Photonic Modules

2*1610+%64#05/+55+10&'5+)057+6' .
+6'
2*1610+%/1&7.'54'('4'0%'/#07#.
#&'/10564 #6+108'45+101(26&5(149+0&19506
*QYVQ%QPVCEV82+
0QTVJ#OGTKEC 'WTQRG
1474 Sacramento St., #402 Helmholtzstr. 2–9

San Francisco, CA 94109/USA D-10587 Berlin/Germany
Phone +1-415-567-8472 Phone +49-30-34704715
Fax +1-415-567-9499 Fax +49-30-34704717
#UKC2CEKHKE 9QTNF9KFG9GD
Photonics House www.virtualphotonics.com

129-131 Bouverie St.
Carlton, Victoria 3053/Australia
Phone +61-3-9348 2399
Fax +61-3-9347 4471
support@virtualphotonics.com Technical support, license key requests

info@virtualphotonics.com General information
sales@virtualphotonics.com Sales, pricing, ordering information
Copyright 1999, VPI. All Rights Reserved.

Portions are copyright 1997, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. All Rights Reserved.
Portions are copyright 1990-1997, The Regents of the University of California. All rights
reserved.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
TICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT,
UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement. The software may be used or
copied only under the terms of the license agreement. No part of this manual may be photocopied or reproduced
in any form without prior written consent from VPI.
All registered and unregistered trademarks are the sole property of their respective owners.
KK 2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
%QPVGPVU
%QPVGPVU KKK
/QFWNG+PFGZ XKK
%QPXGPVKQPU KZ
+PHQTOCVKQP5QWTEGU%QFKPI
PRBS Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

NRZ Coder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CoderNRZ_El . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Rise Time Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RiseTimeAdjust . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
'NGEVTKECN1RVKECN2WNUGU
Pulse Sechant (Optical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PulseSechOpt . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Pulse Sechant Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxPulseSechOpt . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
.CUGTU.'&U
Laser CW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LaserCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Laser Rate Equations (Single Mode) . . . . . . . . . LaserRateEqSM . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Externally Modulated Laser Transmitter . . . . . TxExtModLaser . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Laser Array Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TxLaserArray . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Laser (Transmission Line Model) . . . . . . . . . . . LaserTLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
1RVKECN/QFWNCVQTU
Modulator Mach-Zehnder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ModulatorMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
9&//WNVKRNGZGTU
WDM MUX N-1 Ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDM_MUX_N_1_Ideal . . . . 5-3

WDM MUX 4-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDM_MUX_4_1 . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
WDM DEMUX 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDM_DEMUX_1_4 . . . . . . . 5-7
Arrayed Waveguide Grating 1 to N . . . . . . . . . . AWG_1_N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Arrayed Waveguide Grating N to 1 . . . . . . . . . . AWG_N_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
(KDGTU
Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber (NLS) . . . . . . . . . . . FiberNLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN KKK
Fiber NLS Random Birefringence PMD
(Coarse Step) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FiberNLS_PMD . . . . . . . . . .6-15
1RVKECN#ORNKHKGTU
Ideal Amplifier with Wavelength

Independent Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AmpSysOpt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Erbium-doped Fiber Amplifier
(rate- and propagation-equation
according to an improved Giles-model) . . . . . . . AmpEDFA_RateEqStat . . . . .7-9
Traveling Wave Semiconductor
Optical Amplifier (SOA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AmpSOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25
Erbium-doped Fiber
(rate- and propagation-equation
according to an improved Giles-model) . . . . . . . EDF_RateEqStat . . . . . . . . .7-30
Dynamic Amplifier EDFA
(improved Bononi model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AmpEDFA_Dynamic . . . . . .7-37
1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Filter FBG Bidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterFBG_Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

Fiber Bragg Grating Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterFBG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Filter Gaussian (Optical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterGaussBP_Opt . . . . . . .8-13
Filter Bessel (Optical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterBesselBP_Opt . . . . . . .8-16
Filter Trapezoid (Optical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterTrapezBP_Opt . . . . . . .8-20
Filter Inverted Trapezoid (Optical). . . . . . . . . . FilterTrapezBS_Opt . . . . . . .8-24
2CUUKXG%QORQPGPVU
Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3

X Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X_Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Isolator Ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IsolatorIdeal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Circulator Clockwise Non-Ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . CirculatorCwNonIdeal . . . . . .9-8
1RVKECN0GVYQTM'NGOGPVU
Dispersion Management
(Postcompensation, 2 Amplifiers) . . . . . . . . . . . DispMngPost2Amp . . . . . . .10-3
Dispersion Management
(Precompensation, 2 Amplifiers) . . . . . . . . . . . . DispMngPre2Amp . . . . . . . .10-8
Frequency Converter (SOA and FWM). . . . . . . FrequencyShiftSOA_FWM 10-13
Frequency Converter (SOA and XGM) . . . . . . . FrequencyShiftSOA_XGM .10-16
WADM Ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDM_ADM . . . . . . . . . . . .10-19
1RVKECN4GEGKXGTU
Photodiode PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotodiodePIN . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
KX 2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
Clock Recovery Ideal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ClockRecoveryIdeal . . . . . . . 11-6
'NGEVTKECN(KNVGTU
Filter LP Bessel (Electrical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterBesselLP_El . . . . . . . . 12-3
4KPI&GUKIP
Ring Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RingSetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Ring Initialization (Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RingInitialize . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
8KUWCNK\GTU
Optical Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViOSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Time Domain Visualizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViScope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
RF Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViRFSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21
Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Powermeter . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
BER Estimation (Gaussian Assumption) . . . . . BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
BER Estimation
(Gaussian Assumption, using Logical Channel) BER_NoRef . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Visualizer XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViXY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-38
105.5KIPCN%QPXGTUKQP
Resample Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ResampleAbsolute . . . . . . . . 15-3

Converter Block To Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BlockToSample . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Converter Sample To Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SampleToBlock . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN X
XK 2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
/QFWNG+PFGZ
# LaserRateEqSM, 3-7
AmpEDFA_Dynamic, 7-37 LaserTLM, 3-24
AmpEDFA_RateEqStat, 7-9 /
AmpSOA, 7-25 ModulatorMZ, 4-3
AmpSysOpt, 7-3 2
Attenuator, 9-3 PhotodiodePIN, 11-3
AWG_1_N, 5-11 Powermeter, 14-28
AWG_N_1, 5-17 PRBS, 1-3
$ PulseSechOpt, 2-3
BER, 14-29 4
BER_NoRef, 14-34 ResampleAbsolute, 15-3
BlockToSample, 15-5 RingInitialize, 13-4
% RingSetup, 13-3
CirculatorCwNonIdeal, 9-8 RiseTimeAdjust, 1-9
ClockRecoveryIdeal, 11-6 5
CoderNRZ_El, 1-7 SampleToBlock, 15-6
Counter, 14-37 6
& TxExtModLaser, 3-15
DispMngPost2Amp, 10-3 TxLaserArray, 3-19
DispMngPre2Amp, 10-8 TxPulseSechOpt, 2-7
' 8
EDF_RateEqStat, 7-30 ViOSA, 14-3
( ViRFSA, 14-21
FiberNLS, 6-3 ViScope, 14-11
FiberNLS_PMD, 6-15 ViXY, 14-38
FilterBesselBP_Opt, 8-16 9
FilterBesselLP_El, 12-3 WDM_ADM, 10-19
FilterFBG, 8-9 WDM_DEMUX_1_4, 5-7
FilterFBG_Bi, 8-6 WDM_MUX_4_1, 5-4
FilterGaussBP_Opt, 8-13 WDM_MUX_N_1_Ideal, 5-3
FilterTrapezBP_Opt, 8-20 :
FilterTrapezBS_Opt, 8-24 X_Coupler, 9-5
FrequencyShiftSOA_FWM, 10-13
FrequencyShiftSOA_XGM, 10-16
+
IsolatorIdeal, 9-7
.
LaserCW, 3-3
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN XKK
XKKK 2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
%QPXGPVKQPU
The following conventions are used throughout PTDS Photonic Modules Refer-
ence Manual to provide consistent and systematic access to information.
Note that this edition of the manual describes only those modules contained in
the Photonic Transmission Design Suite Lite, which is a subset of PTDS.
6[RGUGVVKPI
Parameter names are printed using bold face, parameter settings using type-
writer face and, port names using italics.
/QFWNG2CIG
Every module description page consists of the following elements:

• Title bar: Contains the full name of module and corresponding icon.
• The abbreviated name of module as used in the PTDS software.
• Purpose: Short description - usually a few sentences - of the module purpose.
• Inputs & Outputs: Short description of the input and output ports of the module
together with their associated data type
• Parameter tables: Contain detailed description the different parameters relat-
ed to the documented module. See below for a more complete description.
• Description: A complete description of the module including (when applicable)
the physical model, numerical algorithms, illustrative examples, and technical
references.
• Signal Representation: Description of supported signal representations, e.g.
noise bins and parameterized signals.
2QTVU
KPRWVUQWVRWVU
A brief description of the input and output ports are given for every module. Their
data types can be of the following types:
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN KZ
Optical Blocks: This type can include a complete signal list of blocks of sampled
bands (SFB), parameterized signals (P) and noise bins (NB), see System Designer
User’s Manual for a complete description.
Optical Samples: This type is used to represent the optical signal as individual sam-
ples. See Component Designer User’s Manual a complete description.
Electrical Blocks: Blockwise representation of sampled electrical signal.
Electrical Samples: Individual sample representation of electrical signal. See Com-
ponent Designer User’s Manual a complete description.
Ptolemy native data types: int, float, complex, the matrix data types intmatrix, float-
matrix, complexmatrix
2CTCOGVGTU
All user-settable parameters of a module are displayed in a table. The parameters

are grouped in the following tables:
• Physical Parameters: Parameter describing the physical properties of the mod-
ule and the signals, plus important simulation parameters such as bit and sam-
ple rate (BitRate, SampleRate). Examples are reference frequencies, power
values, dispersion values, bit rates, and length and height of components.
• Numerical Parameters: Parameters concerning the algorithm used, e.g. for fi-
ber and amplifier simulations. Examples are the maximum step width or maxi-
mum phase change for a single iteration.
• Enhanced Simulation Parameters: Parameters not falling in the previous
two categories, including handling of signal representations, other options and
the deactivation parameter.
The columns of the parameter tables give the following information:
• Name and Description: The name of the parameters together with a brief de-
scription.
• Symbol: The mathematical symbol used in descriptions and equations.
• Unit: When applicable, this states the unit used for the given parameter, e.g.
whether a power value is to be entered in dBm or W.
• Data Type: States the computer data type associated with the given parameter,
e.g. real, int or enum.
• Volatile: If set to yes, parameter changes (e.g. by Magic modules) take effect be-
tween several firings of the module in a single simulation run. If no, this changes
takes effect only during the next run of the simulation.
• Value Range: PTDS allows for range checking of real and integer valued param-
eters before a simulation is performed. Square brackets (“[” and “]”) are used to
indicate the interval of accepted values. Note that the orientation of these sym-
Z 2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
bols denotes whether or not the border values are included in the interval. For a
complete list see Table 1. The action performed if the value is outside the speci-
fied range is determined by a superscript (see Table 2). The default action is
aborting the simulation (a). Note, that multiple ranges may be specified for
one parameter.
• Default Value: Default value for the given parameter.
Table 1. Notation used for parameter Value Range

Notation Meaning
[0,∞[ 0 ≤ x < ∞ , i.e., zero is an accepted value.
]0,∞[ 0 < x < ∞ , i.e., zero will not be accepted.
]0,1] 0 < x ≤ 1 , i.e., the upper limit is contained in the interval, while the lower limit is
not.
[−1,1] –1 ≤ x ≤ 1 , i.e., both border values are valid.
ON, OFF For enumerations, the values are listed explicitly.
— For proper strings, the range of permissible values is often context-dependent. E.g.,
strings used as file names may assume any value that is accepted by the operating
system platform as a legal file name. In such cases, the Value Range field is often left
empty.
Table 2. Actions taken if value is outside the Value Range specification

Notation Meaning
a
[0,1] The simulation is aborted.
w
[0,1] A warning is issued.
[0,1]r The parameter is reset to its default value.
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN ZK
ZKK 2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU
.KDTCT[
Note that this edition of the Photonic Modules Reference Manual describes
only those modules contained in the Photonic Transmission Design Suite Lite,
which is a subset of PTDS.
Information Sources & Coding 1-1

Electrical & Optical Pulses 2-1
Lasers & LEDs 3-1
Optical Modulators 4-1
WDM Multiplexers 5-1
Fibers 6-1
Optical Amplifiers 7-1
Optical Filters, FBG & AWG 8-1
Passive Components 9-1
Optical Network Elements 10-1
Optical Receivers 11-1
Electrical Filters 12-1
Ring Design 13-1
Visualizers 14-1
ONSL Signal Conversion 15-1
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN ZKKK
ZKX 2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
1-
+PHQTOCVKQP5QWTEGU%QFKPI
PRBS Generator 1-3

NRZ Coder 1-7
Rise Time Adjustment 1-9
2JQVQPKE/QFWNGU4GHGTGPEG/CPWCN
24$5)GPGTCVQT
24$5)GPGTCVQT
24$5 +PHQTOCVKQP5QWTEGU%QFKPI
Purpose
The module generates a pseudo random or other types of binary sequences.
Outputs
output = binary sequence
(signal type: Int)
Physical Parameters
Default
Name and Description Symbol Unit Type Volatile Value Range Value
PRBS_Type defines the type of — — enum no PRBS, PRBS
binary sequence PRBS_N,
FixedMarkNum-
ber,
CodeWord,
ReadFromFile,
Alternate,
One,
Zero
BitRate bit rate of the signal rb bit/s real no ]0,∞[ BitRate-
Default
PreSpaces number of leading m — int yes [0, TimeWin- 1
zero bits dow⋅BitRate]
PostSpaces number of trailing n — int yes [0, TimeWin- 1
zero bits dow⋅BitRate −
PreSpaces]
MarkProbability probability — — real yes [0,1] 0.5
of marks “1” ’s in the bit sequence
PRBS_Order order k of the k — int yes [1,30] 7
PRBS generator with a period of
2k−1
MarkNumber exact number of l — int yes [0, TimeWin- 7
marks “1” ’s in the bit sequence dow⋅BitRate −
PreSpaces −
PostSpaces]
CodeWord user-defined — — intarray yes — —
code-word
InputFilename name of a file — — filename no — —
to read a specified bit sequence
from
24$5)GPGTCVQT
Enhanced Simulation Parameters
Name and Description Symbol Unit Type Volatile Value Range Default Value
OutputFilename name of a — — file- no — —
file to save the bit sequence which nam
has been sent e
ControlFlagReset defines the — — enu no Continue, Continue
behavior of the module on repeti- m Reset
tive calls
ControlFlagWrite defines the — — enu no Append, Overwrite
mode of writing to the file speci- m Overwrite
fied by the parameter OutputFile-
name
RandomNumberSeed lookup — — int no [0,10000] 0
index for noise generation. A
value of zero implies an auto-
matic, unique seed.
Description
A pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) is usually required when modeling the
information source in simulations of digital communication systems. The binary se-
quence can be generated with the use of a random number generator, or, alterna-
tively, can be directly specified by the user or read from a specified file. The PRBS
module produces a sequence of N bits (TimeWindow/BitRate) with the numbers m
and n of zero bits (spaces) preceding and succeeding the generated bit sequence of
length N−m−n. The numbers m and n can be set by the user via parameters
PreSpaces and PostSpaces, respectively. The sequence of generated bits may be
saved to or read from a file.
m N−m−n n
Figure 1. A sequence of N bits contains m preceding and n succeeding zero bits.
For the binary sequence generation, the following operation modes of PRBS module
which are controlled by parameter PRBS_Type are selectable:
• PRBS_Type = PRBS: The modified Wichman–Hill–Generator (see System De-
signer User’s Manual, Noise Generation) is used, with parameter MarkProba-
bility specifying the probability of “1” bits in the sequence. The length of the
24$5)GPGTCVQT
random sequence is equal to N−m−n; in addition m leading and n trailing zero

bits are generated as mentioned above. Parameter RandomNumberSeed de-
fines the index of the seed value for the random number generator.
• PRBS_Type = PRBS_N: The “classic” PRBS generator is used with order k (giv-
en by parameter PRBS_Order) and a period of 2k−1. The length of the random
sequence at the module output is equal to N−m−n; in addition, m leading and n
trailing zero bits are generated. If 2k−1<N−m−n, the sequence is periodically
repeated. Parameter RandomNumberSeed defines the index for seed bits
a1,a2,…,ak for the generator.
• PRBS_Type = FixedMarkNumber: the exact number of marks l (parameter
MarkNumber) can be specified by the user. The random sequence of N−m−n
bits consists of l marks and N−m−n−l spaces. Additionally, m leading and n
trailing zero bits are generated. This option is useful to generate different ran-
dom binary sequences with the same average value and, consequently, to en-
sure equal average optical power after NRZ (Non Return to Zero) or RZ (Return
to Zero) coding and modulation of the light sources. The random number gener-
ator is used in this case to determine l mark positions in the number of N−m−n
total available positions.
• PRBS_Type = CodeWord: A user-specified code-word in the form of an intar-
ray, e.g. “1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1” (parameter CodeWord) is used to define the out-
put. The length of the user data is N−m−n. Additionally, m leading and n
trailing zero bits are generated. The user-specified sequence is periodically re-
peated from the beginning, if the number of bits to be generated is larger than
the number of available bits in the CodeWord.
• PRBS_Type = ReadFromFile: the operation of the PRBS module is similar to
that with PRBS_Type = CodeWord, the only difference being, that the user
data and the m leading and n trailing zero bits are read from a file. The filena-
me is given by the parameter InputFilename. The file must be in ASCII-form.
The standard format is
PreSpaces
2
PostSpaces
2
CodeWord
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
where the bit values may be delimited by blanks, tabs, CR’s or LF’s.
Another possibility, is to supply a file wihout any headers containing the bit
values only. In this case the m leading and n trailing bits are ignored and the
binary sequence from the file is sent to the output port.
• PRBS_Type = Alternate: An alternating sequence of N−m−n bits is generat-
ed, starting with a “1” value. Additionally m leading and n trailing zero bits are
generated.
• PRBS_Type = One: A sequence of N−m−n “1” bits with m leading and n trail-
ing zero bits is generated;
24$5)GPGTCVQT
• PRBS_Type = Zero: A sequence of N−m−n “0” bits with m leading and n trail-
ing zero bits is generated.
The parameter ControlFlagReset defines the behavior of the module on repetitive
calls.
• If the value of ControlFlagReset parameter is equal to Reset, the random
number generator is re-initialized (for PRBS_Type = PRBS, PRBS_N or Fixed-
MarkNumber) and begins to generate a PRBS-sequence from the very begin-
ning. Similarly, for PRBS_Type = CodeWord or ReadFromFile the user data
are reread for each module firing.
• If the value of ControlFlagReset parameter is Continue, the random num-
ber generator (for PRBS_Type = PRBS, PRBS_N or FixedMarkNumber) contin-
ues to generate new random bits of the same random sequence. For
PRBS_Type = CodeWord or PRBS_Type = ReadFromFile the user data are
read successively on each module firing, till the end of the string or of the file is
reached. If the number of bits to be generated is greater than the number of
available (remaining) bits in the user string or in the file, the data sequence is
periodically repeated from the beginning.
The generated sequence may be saved to a file specified by the parameter Output-
Filename. If OutputFilename is an empty string, no file is created. The mode of
writing is defined by the parameter ControlFlagWrite. On each firing, the file is
either overwritten (ControlFlagWrite = Overwrite) or the new data are append-
ed to the file (ControlFlagWrite = Append). The format of the generated output
file specified by OutputFilename is the same as of the input file and is described
above.
Reinitialization Behavior
Multiple Runs: see parameter ControlFlagReset
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: complete reset of module
Comments
Currently, the number of bits, N, in the simulation has to be a power of two.
04<%QFGT
04<%QFGT
%QFGT04<A'N +PHQTOCVKQP5QWTEGU%QFKPI
Purpose
The module generates a sampled, NRZ (Non Return to Zero) coded signal defined by
a train of bits at its input. The input bit sequence is typically produced by the PRBS
Generator module.
Although this module appears trivial, it is required to convert between a digital sig-
nal and an electrical signal, so that electrical filtering may be implemented.
Inputs
input = bit sequence to encode
(signal type: Int)
Outputs
output = electrical NRZ coded signal
(signal type: Electrical Blocks, Electrical Samples)
Physical Parameters
BitRate rb bit/s real yes ]0,∞[a BitRateDe-
bit rate of the signal fault
SampleRate fs Hz real yes ]0,∞[a SampleRat-
sample rate of the signal eDefault
Enhanced Parameters
ChannelLabel — — string no — —
label for the logical channel generated
OutputDataType — — enum no SAMPLES, BLOCKS
defines if to produce individual sam- BLOCKS
ples or signal blocks as output
Description
The module generates for each input bit, an electrical Non Return to Zero coded sig-
nal (see Figure 1).
A NRZ pulse has a single value over the entire bit length, i.e., the “1” is coded by a
high level with non-zero amplitude and the “0” by a low level with zero amplitude.
04<%QFGT
Logical Information
The logical information set which is attached to the output signal contains informa-
tion on the transmitted bit sequence and the original pulse shape. The label of this
information set can be set by parameter ChannelLabel. If this parameter is empty,
a default label composed of the instance name of the module will be used.
To use the information of this transmitter for the estimation of the bit error rate, set
the parameter ChannelLabel of the BER estimator to the same value as the same
parameter of this module.
Signal Representation: Block
The output signal always consists of a single electrical sampled band.
Signal Representation: Individual Samples
The output field is the same as in the case of a single electrical sampled band. A
number of SampleRate × TimeWindow (global parameter) output particles, each
containing an individual sample, are generated.
Comments
The number of samples per bit is given by the ratio of SampleRate/BitRate and
has to be a power of two.
The sample rate sets the bandwidth of the electrical signal to be (sample rate)/2.
Amplitude
1 0
Time
0
Tb Tb
Figure 1. NRZ coded “1” and “0” bits.
4KUG6KOG#FLWUVOGPV
4KUG6KOG#FLWUVOGPV
4KUG6KOG#FLWUV +PHQTOCVKQP5QWTEGU%QFKPI
Purpose
The module is a Gaussian filter that transforms, for example, rectangular electrical
input pulses into smoother output pulses with a user-defined rise-time.
Inputs
input = electrical preshaped (e.g. NRZ/RZ) pulses
(signal type: Electrical Blocks)
Outputs
output = electrical pulses with a user-defined rise-time
Physical Parameters
Name and Description Symbol Unit Type Volatile Value Range Default Range
RiseTime defined by the 10% to ∆t s real yes ]0,10−9] 1.0/16.0/Bit
90% amplitude values of the signal RateDefault
ConserveMemory If ON, the trans- — — enum no ON, OFF
fer function is internally stored and OFF
reused for consecutive runs
Active Defines if the module is active — — enum no ON, ON
or not OFF
Description
This module is used to generate pulses with a user-defined rise-time. An electrical
rectangular NRZ/RZ preshaped input pulse with pulse duration T0 for example is
filtered by a linear time-invariant filter with a normalized Gaussian shaped impulse
response:
2 –( 2t ⁄ T ) 2
h ( t ) = ----------- e , (1)
πT
where T denotes the 1/e-pulse duration. The output pulse y(t) is given as convolution
of h(t) with the rectangular input time function:
4KUG6KOG#FLWUVOGPV
2( t – T0)
y ( t ) = ---  erfc ----------------------- – erfc -----
1 2t
(2)
2 T T
The 10% and 90% amplitude values of y(t) define the RiseTime ∆t, see Figure 1. As
long as the pulse duration T0 is large compared to the filter coefficient T, the
rise-time is approximately ∆t≈3/4×T. For T0 ≥1.5×T , the approximation error is
less than 10%.
x(t) y(t)
1
90%
h(t)
10%
0 ∆t
t
0 T0 0 t
Figure 1. Output pulses with a user-defined rise-time ∆t are generated by filtering

input pulses with a Gaussian shaped filter, in this case a rectangular pulse.
In the frequency domain, the filter is also Gaussian shaped. The 1/e-bandwidth ∆fe
is given by
4
∆f e = ------- (3)
πT
such that for all rise-times ∆t≤0.5⋅T0 the 1/e-bandwidth is approximately
3
∆f e ≈ ------------- . (4)
π ⋅ ∆t
Multiple Runs: If the parameter ConserveMemory is set to ON, the filter’s trans-
fer function is calculated once, then re-used each time the module is executed. Oth-
erwise, the transfer function will be evaluated each run. If the rise-time ∆t changes
in consecutive runs (e.g. using the sweep capability of the Simulation Manager) the
transfer function is recalculated each run.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: If the simulation is reset or re-
started, data stored by the module (e.g. filter transfer function ) will be lost.
Module Deactivation: If the module is deactivated, the input data will be passed
through to the output.
4KUG6KOG#FLWUVOGPV
References:
[1] H. D. LÜKE: Signalübertragung. 3. Auflage, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1985,
pp. 157–159.
4KUG6KOG#FLWUVOGPV
2-
'NGEVTKECN1RVKECN2WNUGU
Pulse Sechant (Optical) 2-3

Pulse Sechant Transmitter 2-7
2WNUG5GEJCPV
1RVKECN
2WNUG5GEJCPV
1RVKECN
2WNUG5GEJ1RV 'NGEVTKECN1RVKECN2WNUGU
Purpose
The module generates optical pulses with a sechant shape, modulated by a bit se-
quence input.
Inputs
input = bit sequence
(signal type: Int)
Outputs
output = Sechant shaped optical pulses
(signal type: Optical Blocks, Optical Samples)
Physical Parameters
BitRate rb bit/s real yes ]0,∞[ BitRateDe-
bit rate of the signal fault
SampleRate fs Hz real no ]0,∞[ SampleRateDe-
sample rate of the signal fault
FWHM TFWHM s real yes ]0,∞[ 1.0/4.0/BitRa
pulse duration (full width at half teDefault
maximum)
PeakPower Pmax W real yes [0,∞[ 1e-3
peak power of the signal
CenterPosition κ — real yes [0,1] 0.5
relative position of the pulse
peak with respect to the bit
frame
EmissionFrequency fc Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
emission frequency of the optical
carrier
InitialPhase φc deg real yes ]−∞,∞[ 0.0
initial phase of the optical car-
rier
Azimuth η deg real yes ] −90, 90] 0
azimuth of the signal polariza-
tion ellipse
Ellipticity ε deg real yes [−45, 45] 0
ellipticity of the signal polariza-
tion ellipse
2WNUG5GEJCPV
1RVKECN
Numerical Parameters
ExcessPulseSlots M — int yes [0,64] 3
number of extra bit slots
label for the logical channel generated
defines if to produce individual samples BLOCKS
or signal blocks as output
Description
bit number n−1 n n+1 n+2

bit value 1 1 1 0
0 (n−1)Tb nTb t
(n−1)Tb+κTb
Figure 1. A sequence of sechant pulses.

Data bits trigger optical pulses with a sechant shape in the time domain (see
Figure 1). The pulse amplitude E(t) for the time slot of bit n (the indexing begins
with 1) is described by
M
1–k
E( t) = 
 kejδ  ∑ b n + l R S ( t – κT b – ( n – 1 )Tb + lTb ), (1)
l = –M
where t ∈ [ ( n – 1 )T b …nT b [ ,
RS ( t ) = P max ⁄ cosh ( 2t ⁄ T FWHM ⋅ arcosh 2 ) exp [ j ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ] , (2)
2WNUG5GEJCPV
1RVKECN
where bn is the nth bit value (“0” or “1”), RS(t) is a complex shape factor of a solitary
pulse, κ takes into account a pulse position with respect to the bit frame (parameter
CenterPosition; the value of 0.5 corresponds to the center of the bit frame),
Tb =1/rb is the bit duration and rb is the BitRate. The summation in (1) includes a
pulse of the bit (n) as well as energy from neighboring pulses.
The maximum number of the neighboring bits from each side is given by M and
specified by ExcessPulseSlots. A periodic continuation is assumed for the bits
which according to (1) are beyond the simulation time window. For aperiodic bound-
ary conditions the input bit sequence is shifted by M. The remaining bits of the in-
put sequence are stored for the next run.
Pmax is the peak power of the signal which is specified by parameter PeakPower.
The power shape is given by P(t)=|E(t)|2.
The full width at half maximum pulse duration TFWHM is specified by parameter
FWHM. For t=±TFWHM/2, the optical pulse power is half of its maximum value.
The carrier frequency of the optical pulse is defined by the parameter
EmissionFrequency fc. With InitialPhase φc , the user can change the phase of
the optical carrier.
The state of polarization (SOP) is described by a Jones vector, see equation (1). The
SOP is defined by the power splitting parameter k (0≤k≤1) and the phase
difference δ between y- and x-polarizations. The relations of k and δ with the
Azimuth η and the Ellipticity ε are given by
k ( 1 – k ) ⋅ cos δ
tan ( 2η ) = 2 ------------------------------------------ ,
1 – 2k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) ⋅ sin δ .
Logical Information
Signal Representation: Blocks
The output signal always consists of a single sampled band. Currently, neither noise
bins nor parametrized signals are supported by this module.
The output field is the same as in the case of a single sampled band. A number of
SampleRate × TimeWindow (global parameter) output particles, each containing
an individual sample, are generated. Since the aperiodic boundary conditions are al-
2WNUG5GEJCPV
1RVKECN
ways assumed for the sampled mode, the input bit sequence is shifted by Ex-
cessPulseSlots, like in the case of the sampled band signals.
Multiple Runs: For aperiodic boundary conditions the input bit sequence is shifted
by the number of ExcessPulseSlots. In the first run these bits are filled by zeros.
Comments
The ratio between SampleRate and BitRate gives a number of discretization
points per one bit and has to be a power of 2.
References
[1] G. P. AGRAWAL: Nonlinear fiber optics. Academic Press, 1995.
2WNUG5GEJCPV6TCPUOKVVGT
6Z2WNUG5GEJ1RV 'NGEVTKECN1RVKECN2WNUGU
Purpose
The module generates a pulse train containing optical sechant pulses. This module
is a galaxy and consists of a PRBS module and PulseSechOpt.
Outputs
output = optical pulse train of sechant-shaped pulses
Physical Parameters
BitRate rb bit/s real no ]0,∞[ BitRateDe-
bit rate of the transmitter fault
SampleRate fs Hz real no ]0,∞[ SampleRate-
sample rate of the signal Default
PRBS:
PRBS_Type — — enum no PRBS, PRBS
defines which type of bit PRBS_N,
stream is produced by the FixedMarkNum-
PRBS source berCodeWord,
ReadFromFile,
Alternate,
One,
Zero
PreSpaces m — int yes ≤ Bits −
number of leading zero bits PostSpaces
with Bits =
TimeWindow ∗
BitRate
PostSpaces n — int yes ≤ Bits −
number of trailing zero bits PreSpaces with
Bits = TimeWin-
dow ∗ BitRate
MarkProbability — — real yes [0,1] 0.5
probability of marks in the bit
sequence
PRBS_Order k — int yes [1,30] 7
order of the PRBS generator
with a period of 2k −1; only
valid for the PRBS_N type of
the generator
MarkNumber l — int yes [0, Bits−m−n] 7
exact number of marks “1” in with Bits =
the bit sequence TimeWindow ∗
BitRate
CodeWord — — intar- yes — —
user-defined code-word to be ray
sent
InputFilename — — file- no — —
file with user-defined bit name
sequence to be read
Pulse Sechant:
FWHM TFWHM s real yes ]0,∞[ 1.0/4.0/Bit
pulse duration (full width at RateDefault
half maximum)
PeakPower Pmax W real yes [0,∞[ 1e-3
peak power of the signal
CenterPosition κ — real yes [0,1[ 0.5
relative position of the pulse
center with respect to bit
frame
emission frequency of the
optical carrier
InitialPhase φc deg real yes ]−∞,∞[ 0.0
initial phase of the optical
carrier
Azimuth η deg real yes ]−90, 90] 0
azimuth of the signal polar-
ization ellipse
Ellipticity ε deg real yes [−45, 45] 0
ellipticity of the signal polar-
ization ellipse
Pulse Sechant:
ExcessPulseSlots M — int yes [0,64] 3
number of extra bit slots
Pulse Sechant:
ChannelLabel The label for — — string no — —
the logical channel generated.
defines if to generate individual BLOCKS
samples or signal blocks
PRBS:
OutputFilename — — file- no — —
file to save the generated bit name
sequence
ControlFlagReset — — enum no CONTINUE, CONTINUE
defines the behavior of the mod- RESET
ule on repetitive calls
ControlFlagWrite — — enum no APPEND, OVERWRITE
mode of writing to the output OVERWRITE
file
RandomNumberSeed — — int no [0,10000] 0
look-up index for noise genera-
tion; a value of zero implies an
automatic unique seed
Description
Figure 1. Schematic of the sechant pulse transmitter.
A sequence of sechant optical pulses is generated using modules PRBS Generator

and Pulse Sechant (Optical).
For more information on the module operation and parameter meaning please see
the description of modules Pulse Sechant (Optical) and PRBS Generator.
Logical Information
3-
.CUGTU.'&U
Laser CW 3-3
Laser Rate Equations (Single Mode) 3-7
Externally Modulated Laser Transmitter 3-15
Laser Array Transmitter 3-19
Laser (Transmission Line Model) 3-24
.CUGT%9
.CUGT%9
.CUGT%9 .CUGTU.'&U
Purpose
The module produces a continuous wave (CW) optical signal.
Outputs
output = continuous wave optical signal
Physical Parameters
SampleRate fs Hz real no ]0,∞[ SampleRate-
sample rate of the system Default
laser emission frequency
AveragePower Pave W real yes [0,∞[ 1.0e-3
average output power
Linewidth ∆f Hz real yes [0,∞[ 10e6
linewidth of the laser
Azimuth η deg real yes ]−90,90] 0
azimuth angle of the output polariza-
tion
Ellipticity ε deg real yes [−45,45] 0
ellipticity angle of the output polariza-
tion
InitialPhase φc deg real no ]−∞,∞[ 0
initial phase
lookup index for noise generation; a
value of zero implies an automatic,
unique seed
NoiseBandwidth — Hz real no [0,∞[ 0
bandwidth in which noise bins are cre-
ated
NoiseDynamic — dB real no ]−∞,∞[ 3.0
maximum allowed ratio of noise “col-
oredness” within one single bin
.CUGT%9
NoiseThreshold — dB real no ]−∞,∞[ -100
noise threshold for adaption of noise
bins
OutputDataType — — enum no BLOCKS, BLOCKS
defines if to produce signal blocks or PARAME-
statistical signals TERIZED
Active — — enum yes ON, ON
defines if the module is active or not OFF
Description
∫
j ω (τ ) d τ
e
ω(t)
white frequency
Eb(t)
noise modulator
variance = 2π∆f
 1 – k
P 
 kejδ 
Figure 1. Schematic of the modeled DFB CW laser.
The module produces a time dependent field Eb(t), which is normalized to the user
specified power Pave (parameter AveragePower). The emission frequency of the
cw-laser is defined by the parameter EmissionFrequency.
The laser model (see Figure 1) contains a Gaussian white noise source with a vari-
ance of 2π∆f corresponding to the optical laser Linewidth ∆f.
The output is multiplied with a complex vector considering the state of polarization
(SOP). The baseband signal of the optical output cw-wave is therefore determined
by
 1 – k
Eb ( t ) = P  ⋅ exp ( j ∫ ω(τ) dτ ) . (1)
 ke jδ 
The SOP is given by the power splitting parameter k (0≤k≤1) and an additional
phase δ. The relations of k and δ with the Azimuth η and the Ellipticity ε are giv-
en by
.CUGT%9
k ( 1 – k ) ⋅ cos δ
tan ( 2η ) = 2 ------------------------------------------ ,
1 – 2k
sin ( 2ε ) = 2 k ( 1 – k ) ⋅ sin δ .
With the parameter InitialPhase φc, the user can determine the initial phase of the
optical carrier. The parameter RandomNumberSeed specifies an index of a look-
up table for the generation of the laser phase noise. A value of zero produces a
unique seed to start the noise generator. This assures that each noise field generat-
ed in the simulation is uncorrelated to all other noise fields, since a unique seed is
used for each noise generation. Note that for user-specified seed values, correlation
between different noise processes can occur.
The parameter OutputDataType defines if the module produces optical BLOCKS or
STATISTIC as output data.
Signal Representation
Single and Multiple Bands: The module produces a single sampled optical band
according to equation (1).
Parameterized Signals: If the parameter OutputDataType is set to PARAMETER-
IZED, a coarse description of the laser signal is produced. Currently, the output con-
sists of a single value representing the laser output power at the emission
frequency fc.
Noise Bins: The parameter NoiseBandwidth specifies the bandwidth in which
noise bins are created. If the parameter NoiseBandwidth is larger than the pa-
rameter SampleRate and the laser Linewidth is switched on (>0), noise bins are
created. The noise bins represent the Lorentz shape of the output signal due to the
laser linewidth outside of the sampled band. The parameter NoiseDynamic speci-
fies the maximum allowed ratio of noise “coloredness” within a single noise bin. The
parameter NoiseThreshold specifies the threshold relative to the maximum power
value under which no adaption of noise bins due to noise coloredness is performed.
Boundary Conditions: Both pariodic and aperiodic boundary conditions are sup-
ported.
Individual sample mode is supported by this module.
Multiple Runs: In the first run, a unique seed is occupied by each module if the
start seed value was chosen to zero. On consecutive runs, the individual random se-
quence of each module is continued (aperiodic boundary conditions) or repeated (pe-
riodic boundary conditions).
Restart of Simulation: If the simulation is restarted, the same seed values from
the lookup table are used for noise generation. Note that topology changes may
change the specific seed value used by a module.
.CUGT%9
Module Deactivation: If parameter Active is OFF, the laser is switched off and no
output signal is generated.
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
.CUGT4CVG'S5/ .CUGTU.'&U
Purpose
Dynamic properties of laser emitters, such as relaxation oscillation, turn-on jitter,
laser chirp, etc. can significantly affect the performance of optical communication
systems, if a direct laser modulation is used. A “system laser model” described in the
module Laser CW takes into account the spectral and noise properties of the laser
transmitters, but ignores their dynamic behavior. Although the Laser CW model is
suitable for a description of externally modulated CW-lasers, it fails to simulate the
directly modulated lasers. The module Laser Pulsed takes into account the change
of the laser intensity and the adiabatic and dynamic laser chirp in the directly mod-
ulated lasers. However, a number of effects connected with relaxation oscillation
(occurring when the laser current is modulated) is ignored in that model. For this
reason, a “physical laser model” taking into account the dynamic effects was devel-
oped and included into the module library.
PTDS includes detailed laser models based on the Transmission Line Laser Model.
The TLLM modules are able to predict details of the spectral dynamics of lasers
over the full frequency range, and consider the logitudinal structure of the laser.
They can simulate Fabry-Perot, DFB, multisection and external cavity lasers.
Please refer to the Component Designer User’s Manual for further details.
LaserRateEqSM gives an almost identical output to the TLLM if the TLLM of a
Fabry-Perot laser is forced to give a single mode-output by using a narrow material
gain bandwidth.
Inputs
modulation = electrical modulation signal, must be within the range [0,1]
(signal type: Electrical Blocks);
The modulation current normalized to be within the interval [0…1].
The input is multiplied by the scale factor Jmod,norm (parameter Mod-
ulToThreshold) to obtain the ratio Jmod(t)/Jth used in (2).
Outputs
output = modulated optical signal
(signal type: Optical Blocks);
The time dependence of the laser radiation field E(t). The square of its
absolute value |E(t)|2 yields the total output in W.
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
Physical Parameters
SampleRate fs Hz no no ]0,∞[ SampleRat-
sample rate of the system eDefault
laser emission frequency
PowerNorm P1,norm W real yes [0,100 ⋅ 10−3] 5.0e-3
output power from one laser facet
for BiasToThreshold=2.0
BiasToThreshold Jbias/Jth — real yes [1,10] 2.0
ratio of the bias current to the
threshold current
ModulToThreshold Jmod/Jth — real yes [0,10] 0.0
ratio of the current modulation
amplitude to the threshold cur-
rent
Length L m real yes [0,10 ⋅ 10−3] 300e-6
active layer length
Width w m real yes ]0,50 ⋅ 10−6] 3e-6
active layer width
Height h m real yes ]0,5 ⋅ 10−6] 0.2e-6
active layer height
OptConfinement Γ — real yes ]0,1[ 0.3
optical confinement factor
CarrierLifetime τe s real yes ]0,50 ⋅ 10−9] 2.10e-09
electron lifetime
DifferentialGain dg/dN m2 real yes ]0,50 ⋅ 10−20] 3.3e-20
differential gain
IndexToGainCoupl α — real yes ]−20,20] 6.0
linewidth enhancement factor
NonlinearGain κ — real yes ]0,0.5[ 0.03
normalized gain suppression fac-
tor
GroupIndex ngr — real yes ]0,50[ 4.0
group refractive index
OutputCoupling αm m–1 real yes ]0,5⋅104[ 3798.11
cavity loss due to output coupling
InternalLosses αs m–1 real yes ]0,5⋅104[ 2873.00
internal cavity loss
SpontEmissFactor Ktot — real yes [1,50] 1.11298
enhancement factor of spontane-
ous emission
InversionFactor nsp — real yes [1,∞[ 2.0
inversion factor
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
MaxStepsNumber — — int yes [1,109] 100000
maximum number of steps for
ODE solver
RelativeAccuracy — — real yes [10−20,10−1] 1e-6
relative accuracy of computations
in the ODE solver
InitialStepWidth — s real yes [10−15,10−9] 10e-12
initial step size
MinimumStepWidth — s real yes [0,10−9] 0.0
minimum allowed step size
lookup index for noise genera-
tion; a value of zero implies an
automatic, unique seed
defines if to produce signal blocks PARAME-
or statistical signals TRIZED
defines if the module is active or OFF
not
Description
The laser behavior is simulated within the framework of a phenomenological ap-
proach.
It is based on numerical solutions of the laser rate equations [1],[2]. The laser is
considered as a lump device: A spatial dependence of the radiation field is neglected
(averaged), whereas the time dynamics are taken into account. This way, it is possi-
ble to consider the dynamic, spectral, and noise effects, which are relevant in the
communication systems and at the same time not to overload the model with exten-
sive spatial computations.
In the present version the single-mode rate equations are used. They are appropri-
ate for simulations of single-mode lasers: the DFB (distributed feedback) lasers or
the nearly single-mode FP (Fabry-Perot) lasers. Note that the FP-lasers have a side
mode suppression ratio that is not as large as one of DFB-lasers. Therefore, some
multimode effects, such as dynamic excitation of the side modes at modulation or
partition noise, are ignored for nearly single-mode FP-lasers. The laser radiation is
assumed to be linearly polarized, which is valid for most laser types.
Let us consider the laser model in more detail. It is useful to normalize the electric
field E and the intensity of laser radiation P=|E|2 to the values corresponding to the
injection current Jbias, which is twice the threshold current Jth. The carrier density
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
J(t)
Jmod(t)
Jth Jbias
t
Figure 1. The total injection current J(t) consists of the bias current Jbias and the
modulation current Jmod(t), while the laser threshold current Jth is marked by a
dashed line.
N and the laser gain G˜ are normalized to their values at the laser threshold. The la-
ser rate equations in the normalized form are given by:
dE 1 ˜ 2
= ------------ [ G ( N, E ) – 1 ]E + FE ( t ) , (1)
dt 2τ ph
dN 1 J bias + J mod ( t ) 2
= ----- ---------------------------------------- – N – G ( N, E ) + FN ( t ) . (2)
dt τe J th
In (1), (2) the parameters denote:

• Jbias, Jmod(t) and Jth are the laser bias-, modulation- and the threshold cur-
rents, respectively, as shown in Figure 1. The ratios of Jbias/Jth and Jmod/Jth
are specified by the parameters BiasToThreshold and ModulToThreshold,
respectively.
• τph is a photon lifetime as determined by the output coupling of laser radiation
and the internal (scattering) loss
–1
τ ph = c ⁄ ngr ( α m + α s ) , (3)
where the factors αm and αs (specified by parameters OutputCoupling and

InternalLosses) characterize the output coupling and internal losses, respec-
tively (per unit length, units: m–1); c is the light velocity in vacuum, L (given by
parameter Length) is the length of the laser waveguide. The group index ngr
(parameter GroupIndex) is defined as
n gr ( f ) = n ( f ) + f dn ( f ) ⁄ df , (4)
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
where n(f) is the phase refractive index and f is the optical frequency. For DFB
lasers the factor αm can be obtained from numerical calculations [1], while for
FP lasers it is determined by the laser facet reflectivities R1,2:
α m = ------- ln  --------------- .
1 1
(5)
2L  R 1 R 2
• τe (given by CarrierLifetime) is the carrier lifetime characterizing the recom-

bination rate due to spontaneous emission and non-radiative transitions. The
recombination rate for the (non-normalized) carrier density N is given by
dN
-------- ≡ R ( N ) = AN + BN 2 + CN 3 , (6)
dt recomb
where A, B, and C are constants characterizing the different recombination

processes [2]. Since the carrier density fluctuation differs only slightly above
the laser threshold, expression (6) can be linearized, leading to the recombina-
tion term in (2) with carrier lifetime τe given by
1 dR ( N )
----- = ------------------ . (7)
τe dN N
th
• The complex normalized laser gain G̃ ( N, E 2 ) takes into account a dependence

of the gain and the refractive index of laser medium on the carrier density and
(due to the nonlinear effects) on the intensity of laser radiation. The gain is nor-
malized, such that its value at the threshold is equal to unity. A linear approxi-
mation for the dependence on the normalized carrier density yields
ℜ : [ G N ( N – 1 ) + 1 ] ⋅ ( 1 – κ E 2 ) ≡ G ( N, E 2 )
˜ ( N, E 2 ) = 
G  , (8)
 ℑ : jαG N ( N – 1 ) + j2πτ ph ∆f
where α (parameter IndexToGainCoupl) is the linewidth enhancement factor

[3] responsible for the coupling between gain and refractive index. κ is the non-
linear gain suppression factor [1], [2] and can be specified with Nonlinear-
Gain.
The parameter EmissionFrequency fc specifies the lasing frequency.
Note that due to the dependence of the refractive index on the carrier density,
the optical frequency of the laser radiation depends on the injection current (re-
sponsible for the chirp). The reference frequency of the laser model is chosen,
such that it corresponds to the frequency where the total injection current
equals the bias current. GN is the normalized gain coefficient given by
Γ c τ ph N th dg
G N = -------------------------- -------- , (9)
n gr dN
where Γ is the confinement factor (parameter OptConfinement) of the optical

field defined as a fraction of the mode intensity within the active layer [1],[2].
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
dg/dN (units: m2) is the differential gain (parameter DifferentialGain), char-

acterizing the slope of the dependence of the material gain per unit length g(N)
(units: m–1) on the carrier density N (units: m–3). The carrier density at the
threshold Nth can be calculated from the total output power Ptot (both laser fac-
ets) corresponding to the injection current Jbias =2×Jth by
N th = ( S τ e ) ⁄ ( V τ ph ) , (10)
where V=L×w×h is the volume, L is the width (parameter Length), w is the

width (parameter Width) and h is the height (parameter Height) of the active
layer. The photon number S in the laser cavity is connected with Ptot by
P tot = hω ( c ⁄ n gr )α m S , (11)
where h is the Planck constant and ω=2πf is the angular frequency of the light.
It is assumed that Ptot is equally divided for both laser facets Ptot =P1 +P2 with
P1 =P2 =Ptot/2. The output power P1 for the injection current Jbias =2×Jth is de-
noted as P1,norm (parameter PowerNorm) and is used for normalization pur-
poses.
• The terms FE(t) and FN(t) are white noise terms (also denoted as the Langevin
noise sources), which take into account the spontaneous emission and the dis-
crete nature of the carrier generation and recombination. These terms deter-
mine the intensity and the frequency noise characteristics of the laser light, in
particular the laser linewidth. The magnitude of the term FE(t) depends on the
rate of the spontaneous emission, which is given by
R spont = K tot n sp ⁄ τ ph , (12)
where Ktot (given by parameter SpontEmissFactor) is the enhancement fac-

tor of the spontaneous emission accounting for the losses due to output coupling
and for the lateral waveguiding [1]. For the index-guided FP-lasers Ktot is de-
termined by the mirror reflectivities [1]:
( R1 + R2 ) ( 1 – R1 R2 ) 2
K tot = -------------------------------------------------------------------- . (13)
R 1 R 2 ln ( 1 ⁄ ( R1 R2 ) )
The factor nsp is the inversion factor (parameter InversionFactor) [1] which
under typical operating conditions is nsp ≈1.5…2.5. The white noise sources FE,
FN are realized using a random number generator. The parameter Random-
NumberSeed specifies the seed value necessary for its initialization.
Equations (1), (2) are solved numerically using a 5th order Runge-Kutta algorithm
with an adaptive control of the step size. The laser is given sufficient time to reach a
steady-state. Thereafter, the modulation current from the input is applied to the la-
ser. The calculated electric field is multiplied by a normalization factor P 1 ,norm to
obtain the real output power in Watts and then transmitted to the output. The inte-
gration algorithm is controlled by the following parameters:
• Parameter InitialStepWidth is a guessed first step size.
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
• Parameter MinimumStepWidth is the minimum allowed step size.

• Parameter MaxStepsNumber: The ODE solver takes at most Max-
StepsNumber steps.
• Parameter RelativeAccuracy is the relative accuracy of calculations.
Single and Multiple Bands: The module produces a single sampled optical band
according to the laser rate equations (1) and (2).
Parameterized Signals: If the parameter OutputDataType is set to PARAMETER-
IZED a coarse description of the modulated laser output signal is produced. Cur-
rently the output consists of a single value representing the average laser output
power at the emission frequency fc. Moreover the modulation bandwidth is attached
and may be displayed using the Optical Spectrum Analyzer. It is shown as a shad-
owed region together with the carrier.
Noise Bins: Currently no noise bins are produced.
Multiple Runs: In the first run a unique seed is occupied by each module if the
start seed value was chosen to zero. On consecutive runs the individual random se-
quence of each module using the noise generator is continued.
Restart of Simulation: If the simulation is restarted the same seed values from the
lookup table are used for noise generation. Note that topology changes may change
the specific seed value used by a module.
Module Deactivation: If parameter Active is OFF, the laser is switched off and no
output signal is generated.
Comments
The Laser's output power is specified by the laser parameters, and not the drive cur-
rent, which is assumed to be normalised. The ModulToThreshold and BiasTo-
Threshold parameters define the extinction ratio of the laser, and effectively set
the Threshold Current and thus the Transparency Carrier Density value used in
the solution of the rate equations.
Accuracy
The accuracy is governed by the RelativeAccuracy parameter of the ODE solver.
References
[1] K. PETERMANN: Laser diode modulation and noise. Kluwer Academic, Dor-
drecht, The Netherlands, 1988.
[2] G.P. AGRAWAL, N.K. DUTTA: Long-Wavelength Semiconductor Lasers. Van Nos-
trand Reinhold, New York, 1986.
[3] C.H. HENRY: Theory of the linewidth of semiconductor lasers. IEEE
J. Quantum Electron., Vol. QE-18, 1982, pp. 259–264.
.CUGT4CVG'SWCVKQPU
5KPING/QFG
'ZVGTPCNN[/QFWNCVGF.CUGT6TCPUOKVVGT
6Z'ZV/QF.CUGT .CUGTU.'&U
Purpose
The module simulates an externally modulated laser. This module is a galaxy and
consists of a cw laser, a PRBS generator, an NRZ coder, a risetime adjustment and a
Mach-Zehnder modulator.
Outputs
output = optical modulated signal
(signal type: Optical Blocks)
Physical Parameters
SampleRate fs Hz real no ]0,∞[ SampleRat-
sample rate of the signal eDefault
BitRate rb bit/s real no ]0,∞[ BitRateDe-
PRBS:
PreSpaces m — int yes [0,∞] 1
Number of leading zero bits
PostSpaces n — int yes [0,∞] 1
Number of trailing zero bits
stream is produced by the FIXEDMARKNUM-
PRBS source BER,
CODEWORD,
READFROMFILE,
ALTERNATE,
ONE,
ZERO
probability of marks in the
bit sequence
PRBS_Order — — int yes [1,30] 7
sets period of PRBS to be
2k−1; only valid for PRBS_N
type of the generator
MarkNumber l — int yes [0,Bits−m−n] 7
exact number of marks in with
the bit sequence Bits=TimeWin-
dow ∗ BitRate
PRBS_CodeWord — — intarray yes — —
user defined code word to be
sent
PRBS_InputFilename — — filename no — —
file with user-defined bit
sequence to be read
PRBS_OutputFilename — — filename no — —
file to save the generated bit
sequence
Rise Time:
RiseTime — s real yes ]0,10−9[ 1.0/16.0/B
defined by the 10% to 90% itRateDe-
amplitude values of the sig- fault
nal
Mach-Zehnder Modulator:
ModulatorMZ_Extinctio ε dB real yes [0,∞[ 30.0
nRatio
extinction ratio
ModulatorMZ_Symmetry k — real yes [−1,1[ -1.0
Factor
symmetry factor of the mod-
ulator determining the fre-
quency chirp
ModulatorMZ_ChirpSign — — enum no POSITIVE, POSITIVE
sign of the chirp NEGATIVE
Laser CW:
Laser_EmissionFrequen fc Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
cy
emission frequency of the
laser
Laser_AveragePower Pave W real yes [0,∞[ 1.0e-3
average output power of
carrier wave before modula-
tion
Laser_Linewidth ∆f Hz real yes [0,109] 10e6
Laser_Azimuth η deg real yes [−90,90] 0
azimuth of the lasers polar-
ization ellipse
Laser_Ellipticity ε deg real yes [−45,45] 0
ellipticity of the lasers
polarization ellipse
Laser_InitialPhase φc deg real no ]−∞,∞[ 0
initial phase of the laser
label for the logical channel
generated
defines if to produce signal STATISTIC
blocks or statistical signal.
ConserveMemory — — enum no ON, ON
defines if the transfer func- OFF
tion is internally stored and
defines if the module is OFF
active or not
PRBS:
PRBS_ControlFlagReset — — enum no CONTINUE, CONTINUE
defines the behavior of the RESET
module on repetitive calls
PRBS_ControlFlagWrite — — enum no APPEND, OVERWRITE
mode of writing to the out- OVERWRITE
put file
PRBS_RandomNumberS — — int no [0,10000] 0
eed
lookup index for noise gen-
eration; a value of zero
implies an automatic,
unique seed
Laser CW:
Laser_RandomSeed — — int no [0,10000] 0
lookup index to use for noise
generation; a value of zero
implies an automatic,
unique seed
Description
The laser source (Laser CW) is modulated by a Mach-Zehnder modulator (Modula-
tor Mach-Zehnder). The data stream, modulating the continuous wave laser source,
is generated using an NRZ shaped pulse train (module NRZ Coder) with a user-de-
fined rise time of the pulses (module Rise Time Adjustment). All star parameters in-
side the galaxy are set as galaxy parameters. To avoid confusion, the target star of a
parameter is labeled by the star name as a prefix in ambiguous cases. For example,
the index of the seed values of the noise generator in the module Laser CW can be
specified by the user by means of the parameters Laser_RandomSeed, whereas
the seeds of the bit generator in the module PRBS Generator, can be specified by
means of parameter PRBS_RandomNumberSeed.
For more detailed information on each module used within the galaxy, please refer
to the specific module description.
Logical Information
Comments
Note, that due to the modulation the average power of the output signal of each
modulated laser will depend on the generated bit sequence, but will be approximate-
ly 0.5*Laser_AveragePower, as parameter Laser_AveragePower determines
the average power of the carrier wave. The relation is exact only in the case of an
equal number of marks and spaces in the bit sequence and if the extinction ratio of
the MZ modulator tends to infinity.
Figure 1. Implementation of the galaxy.
.CUGT#TTC[6TCPUOKVVGT
6Z.CUGT#TTC[ .CUGTU.'&U
Purpose
The module represents a Laser array which consists of a user defined number of sin-
gle externally modulated transmitters. This module is quite useful for generation of
a WDM signal.
Outputs
output = optical modulated WDM signal
Physical Parameters
EmissionFrequencyOfFirst fstart Hz real yes [−50 ⋅ 1012,50 ⋅ 193.1e12
Channel 1012]
frequency of the lowest channel
ChannelSpacing ∆f Hz real no [0,50 ⋅ 1012] 100e9
relative spacing between adja-
cent channels
Externally Modulated Laser Transmitter:
SampleRate fs Hz real no ]0,∞[ SampleRat-
sample rate of the transmitter eDefault
BitRate rb bps real no ]0,∞[ BitRateDe-
PreSpaces m — int yes [0, Time Win- 1
number of leading zero bits dow ∗ BitRate]
PostSpaces n — int yes [0, Time Win- 1
number of trailing zero bits dow ∗
BitRate−m[
stream is produced by the FIXEDMARKNUM-
PRBS source BER,
CODEWORD,
READFROMFILE,
ALTERNATE,
ONE,
ZERO
probability of marks in the bit
sequence
PRBS_Order — — int yes [1,30] 7
sets period of PRBS to be 2k−1;
only valid for PRBS_N type of
the generator
MarkNumber l — int yes [0,Bits−m−n] with 7
exact number of marks in the Bits=TimeWin-
bit sequence dow ∗ BitRate
PRBS_CodeWord — — intarray yes — —
user defined code word to be
sent
PRBS_InputFilename — — filename no — —
file with user-defined bit
sequence to be read
PRBS_OutputFilename — — filename no — —
file to save the generated bit
sequence
RiseTime — s real yes ]0,10−9[ 1-0/16.0/
defined by the 10% to 90% BitRateDe-
amplitude values of the signal fault
Laser_AveragePower Pav W real yes [0,∞[ 1.0e-3
average output power
Laser_Linewidth ∆f Hz real yes [0,109] 10e6
Laser_Azimuth η deg real yes [−90,90] 0
azimuth of the laser’s polariza-
tion ellipse
Laser_Ellipticity ε deg real yes [−45,45] 0
ellipticity of the laser’s polar-
ization ellipse
Laser_InitialPhase φc deg real no ]−∞,∞[ 0
initial phase of the laser
ModulatorMZ_ExtinctionR ε dB real yes [0,∞[ 30.0
atio
extinction ratio
ModulatorMZ_SymmetryFa k — real yes [−1,1[ -1.0
ctor
symmetry factor of the modula-
tor determining the frequency
chirp
ModulatorMZ_ChirpSign — — enum no POSITIVE, POSITIVE
Externally Modulated Laser Transmitter:
ChannelPrefix The prefix — — string no — Array1
for the labels of the logical
channels generated.
defines if to produce signal PARAMETERIZED
blocks or statistical signal
PRBS_ControlFlagReset — — enum no CONTINUE, CONTINUE
defines the behavior of the RESET
module on repetitive calls
PRBS_ControlFlagWrite — — enum no APPEND, OVERWRITE
mode of writing to the output OVERWRITE
file
PRBS_RandomNumber — — int no [0,10000] 0
Seed
lookup index for noise genera-
tion. A value of zero implies an
automatic, unique seed
defines if the transfer function OFF
is internally stored and reused
for consecutive runs
Laser_RandomSeed — — int no [0,10000] 0
lookup index to use for noise
generation; a value of zero
implies an automatic, unique
seed
defines if the module is active OFF
or not
Description
To form a Laser array, a single Externally Modulated Laser Transmitter module is
used together with a SrcGr star. The latter module has been taken from Ptolemy’s
HOF (Higher Order Function) Domain (see User’s Manual HOF Domain for details)
and its task is to replicate a connected module multiple times while varying certain
parameters. The absolute lasing frequency of the first channel is determined by
EmissionFrequencyOfFirstChannel to define the absolute lasing frequency of
the first channel. The frequency offset of each of the neighbored channels is given by
ChannelSpacing. In addition to the frequency variation, the seed value responsi-
ble for the initialization of the bit generator and the laser, respectively, is changed
via PRBS_RandomNumberSeed. The number of WDM channels at the output is
defined by specifying the bus width. Therefore you have to connect this module’s
output with the subsequent one using Ptolemy’s Bus star (to be found in the FUM
palette). The bus width is then defined by the parameter buswidth in the bus star’s
setup. Figure 1 shows an example of how to use the Laser Array Transmitter in con-
nection with a network design.
Figure 1. Example of a schematic using the module Laser Array Transmitter.
Put the bus module in the space between the array and the multiplexing module and
draw a connection between them. Adjust the buswidth parameter as needed.
Since the SrcGr star included in the Laser Array Transmitter module simply repli-
cates the Laser Array Transmitter and the stars inside of it, the parameters of these
modules have been added to the parameter set of Laser Array Transmitter in order
to be set individually. The target star of a parameter is labelled by a flag in the be-
ginning of the parameter name in ambiguous cases.
For detailed explanation of the parameters, see the documentation on the modules
Laser CW, Modulator Mach-Zehnder, Rise Time Adjustment, NRZ Coder, and PRBS
Generator.
Logical Information
The logical information set which is attached to the output signals contains infor-
mation on the transmitted bit sequence and the original pulse shape. A prefix to the
label of this information set can be set by parameter ChannelPrefix. The full label
of a channel will then be <ChannelPrefix>Channel<number of channel>, e.g. if
ChannelPrefix is set Array1 and the module is connected to a bus of width 3, the
information channels will be labeled ’Array1Channel1’, ’Array1Channel2’ and
’Array1Channel3’.
As the labels of all information channels in a setup must be different, it is not possi-
ble to run two laser arrays with identical settings of parameter ChannelPrefix. An
error message will be issued in this case.
Note: The parameter ChannelPrefix must not be empty, otherwise an error mes-
sage will appear.
To use the information of a specific transmitter for the estimation of the bit error
rate, set the parameter ChannelLabel of the BER estimator to the same value as
the label of the respective information channel.
Example
Set parameter ChannelLabel of the BER estimation module to select which logical
channel to use for the extraction of the transmitted bit sequence
BER
Estimator
BusWidth = 3
ChannelPrefix = ChannelLabel =
Array1 Array1Channel2
Comments
Note, that due to the modulation the average power of the output signal of each
modulated laser will depend on the generated bit sequence, but will be approximate-
ly 0.5*Laser_AveragePower, as parameter Laser_AveragePower determines
the average power of the carrier wave. The relation is exact only in the case of an
equal number of marks and spaces in the bit sequence and if the extinction ratio of
the MZ modulator tends to infinity.
.CUGT
6TCPUOKUUKQP.KPG/QFGN
.CUGT
.CUGT6./ .CUGTU.'&U
Purpose
The LaserTLM (transmission line model) module is a general and highly realistic
model of the semiconductor laser. It operates in the Sample Mode, accepting inputs
on a sample-by-sample basis, and producing outputs at each iteration.
By specifying parameters defining material properties, nonlinear gain coefficients,
coupling between forward and reverse propagating waves and reflection properties
of facets, you can set this model to represent Fabry-Pérot lasers, distributed feed-
back (DFB) lasers and semiconductor optical amplifiers. Furthermore, external cav-
ities can be added to the laser, to make stabilized lasers, multi-section lasers and
ring lasers, for example.
The model accounts for nonlinear effects and spatial inhomogeneities such as spa-
tial holeburning. In general its accuracy is limited only by the finite number of scat-
tering matrices used along its length to represent the optical processes. You can
trade speed for accuracy by setting the Sample Rate of the input signals, but this is
not to say that the models are slow compared to many other algorithms used. Please
refer to the description below and to the description of the TLLM (transmission-line
laser model) within the Component Designer User’s Manual for further details.
Inputs
leftInput = Input of optical signal.
(signal type: Optical Samples)
rightInput=Input of optical signal.
electricalInput=Input of electrical signal.
(signal type: Electrical Samples)
Outputs
leftOutput=Output of optical signal.
rightOutput=Output of optical signal.
electricalOutput=Output of electrical signal.
(signal type: Electrical Samples)
.CUGT
Physical Parameters
NominalWavelength wave- — m real yes ]0,∞[a 1.5525246e-06
length used to calculate photon
energy
LaserChipLength length of — m real no ]0,∞[a 4.0e-04
laser
ActiveRegionWidth width of — m real no ]0,∞[a 3.5e-06
the laser
ActiveRegionThickness — m real no ]0,∞[a 0.18e-06
depth of the laser
GroupEffectiveIndex group — — real no ]0,∞[a 3.7
index
ConfinementFactor optical G — real yes ]0,∞[a 0.35
confinement factor
IndexGratingCouplingCoeffic k m-1 real yes [0,∞[a 5000.0
ient normalized index cou-
pling constant
GainGratingCouplingCoeffici — m-1 real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
ent normalized gain coupling
constant (not used)
LeftFacetReflectivity — — real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e-12
left facet power reflectivity
RightFacetReflectivity — — real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e-12
right facet power reflectivity
FixedInternalLoss material — m-1 real yes [0,∞[a 5000.0
scattering loss (nepers/m)
LeftGratingFacetPhase — degrees real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
phase of the left facet w.r.t grat-
ing
RightGratingFacetPhase — degrees real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
phase of the right facet w.r.t grat-
ing
GratingStopbandFrequency — Hz real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
tunes the laser’s stop-band w.r.t.
centre of the sampled band
InitialCarrierDensity — m-3 real yes ]0,∞[a 1.0e+24
initial carrier density
ChirpReferenceCarrierDensit — m-3 real yes ]0,∞[a 2.0e+24
y carrier density for zero chirp
QuarterWaveShift = ON if — — enum yes ON, OFF OFF
QuarterWave Shift in grating,
OFF otherwise
LinearMaterialGainCoefficie a m2 real yes ]0,∞[a 3.0e-20
nt gain cross-section
TransparencyCarrierDensity N0 m-3 real yes ]0,∞[a 1.5e+24
carrier density for zero material
gain
.CUGT
MaterialLinewidthEnhancem αH — real yes ]0,∞[a 4.0
entFactor linewidth enhance-
ment factor (Henry’s alpha factor)
LinearRecombinationCoeffi- A s-1 real yes [0,∞[a 0.00
cientlinear term of recombina-
tion
BimolecularRecombinationC B m3 s-1 real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e-16
oefficient quadratic term of
recombination
AugerRecombinationCoeffi- C m6 s-1 real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e-41
cientcubic term of recombination
PopulationInversionParamet β/nsp — real yes ]0,∞[a 2.0
er spontaneous coupling factor
nsp if >= 1.0, population inversion
parameter β if <1.0
NonlinearGainCoefficient e m-3 real yes [0,∞[a 6.0e-23
gain compression factor
GainPeakFrequency center — Hz real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
freq. of gain filter w.r.t. sampled
band center
GainPeakFreqCarrierDepend — Hz m3 real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
ence rate of change in gain fil-
ter center freq. with N
GainCoefficientSpectralWidt — Hz real yes ]0,∞[a 1.0e+15
h bandwidth of gain filter
GainCoeffSpectralWidthCarri — Hz m3 real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
erDependence rate of change
in gain filter bandwidth with N
SpontaneousEmissionPeakFr — Hz real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
equency center freq. of spont
noise filter w.r.t. sampled band
center
SpontaneousEmissionFreqCa — Hz m3 real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
rrierDependence change in
spont noise filter centre freq. with
N
SpontaneousEmissionSpectra — Hz real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e+15
lWidth bandwidth of spont
noise filter
SpontaneousSpectralWidthCa — Hz m3 real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
rrierDependence rate of
change in spont. noise filter band-
width with N
CarrierDependentInternalLo αFC m2 real yes [0,∞[a 0.0
ssCoefficient coefficient of loss
due to free carrier absorption
.CUGT
General Description
The LaserTLM module implements the Transmission Line Laser Model based on a
a reformulated version of [1], which mathematically models the laser as a concate-
nation of 2 × 2 scattering matrices. Each matrix relates the complex amplitudes of
the forward and backward propagating wave entering and leaving the section of the
laser it models. The waves are assumed to be in the same transverse-lateral mode of
the laser waveguide. The carrier density is assumed to be constant across a section,
and thus the coupling between the forward and backward propagating waves is as-
sumed to be constant throughout a section.
The TLLM method is covered in detail in the Component Designer User’s Manual.
Choice of SamplingModeBandwidth (Sample Rate)

The TLLM models the laser’s behaviour as the evolution of the complex wave ampli-
tudes. In each iteration (iterating at the sample rate, set by the SampleMode-
Bandwidth) they propagate from scattering node to scattering node, then scatter
at all of the nodes. The model thus acts as a recursive, nonlinear digital filter of or-
der equal to the number of sections. The SampleModeBandwidth should be suffi-
ciently high to render these sections short enough that the grating and the carrier
inhomogeneity is modelled with sufficient accuracy. The number of sections is sim-
ply the laser’s length divided by the distance the waves can propagate within one
sampling interval (1/sample rate). Virtual Photonics recommends the following
goals for sampling rate selection:
• The spatial step length should be less than about 40 µm, translating to a sam-
pling interval of 0.5 ps (sampling rate of 2 THz) in a lasing medium with a
group effective index of 4.0;
• Of course, if the laser chip length is shorter than a few hundred micrometers,
the sampling rate may have to be increased to yield enough sections in the mod-
el;
• Ultimately, you will have to experiment with different sampling rates to ensure
that your results are not substantially changed by the use of a higher sampling
rate than the one finally chosen for simulation.
Note that even a laser cavity that is homogeneous in its quiescent state will assume
spatial inhomogeneities during switch-on, due to light-induced changes in material
properties brought about by material nonlinearities and carrier depletion. Hence,
the laser’s quiescent spatial structure is not necessarily indicative of the
length-scale of any inhomogeneities occurring on power-up.
It is important to emphasize that at present the user is responsible for ensuring
that the sampling rate is high enough for their desired accuracy. Moreover, the
module assumes that the sampling rate is set to the ONSL global simulation at-
tribute SampleModeBandwidth, accessible from the Property Editor of the Uni-
verse. The module checks the sampling rate of each incoming ONSL token in the
input data streams and throws an error if it detects a violation of this condition,
thus ensuring that the user will always be aware of sampling rate incompatibilities.
.CUGT
Operation with Block-Mode Modules

Sample-Mode modules can be connected to Block-Mode modules using the modules
Sample to Block, and Block to Sample. This is detailed in the Component Designer
User’s Manual.
It is wise to note that many Sample Mode modules require sampling rates of 1-THz
and higher, whereas Block Mode modules typically only require sampling rates of
100-GHz and less. Whilst Block Mode modules will work accurately with the high
sampling rates typically required by t Sample Mode modules, substantially im-
proved computation speeds may be achieved by operating Block Mode modules sub-
stantially below the SampleModeBandwidth. For example, an 80-GHz sampling
rate could be used for the system’s block-mode components, and a 2560-GHz rate for
the sampling mode components. The modules could then be connected using Resam-
ple modules for up and down-sampling, with appropriate optical filters.
If ONSL resampling modules are not used, the BlockToSample and SampleToBlock
modules will effect the required conversion with identical numerical results, the
only difference being is that a non-fatal warning will be thrown in the latter case.
For clarity of simulation diagrams, the explicit inclusion of up- and downsampling
modules is recommended.
Noise Processes in TLLM
The TLLM model includes stochastic modelling of spontaneous emission, in that
Gaussian white noise is added to the forward and backward propagating wave am-
plitudes at each section. This approach will lead to observable, substantial varia-
tions of the switch-on behaviour of the same model under identical conditions, with
the most notable fluctuation being the jitter in switch-on time, and large amplitude
variations of the initial transient. This fluctuation arises because the photon popu-
lation is seeded from random noise, which must occur close to the final emission fre-
quency in order to seed the growth of a laser pulse. Of course, if the random-number
generator driving this modelling process is initialized with the same seed at all
times, the same model will yield the same results for the same operating conditions.
Cavity Waveguide Assumption
The model is intended for semiconductor lasers with index-guided cavities, i.e. light
propagates backwards and forwards in the device along a single-moded waveguide
wherein any higher order modes are cutoff, so that their propagation from one end
of the device is negligible, and they cannot therefore play any significant role in de-
termining the laser’s behavior. The TLLM model could in principle be readily ex-
tended to model systems violating this condition, but the scattering matrices would
have to be of order (2 Ν)×(2 Ν), where N is the number of forward propagating modes
above cutoff. If the model is being used to model a commercial edge-emitting semi-
conductor laser chip, the waveguide is almost certainly single moded and the model
will be sound. However, if the user is designing and fabricating their own chip, the
soundness of the model must be checked using an appropriate waveguide model; see
for example [2].
.CUGT
Lasing Wavelength
The actual lasing frequency of a laser is not determined by the nominal
wavelength parameter. This parameter is only used to calculate the photon ener-
gy.
• For a Fabry-Perot laser, the nominal lasing wavelength is determined by a com-
bination of: the gain curve position (which is normally centred on the modelled
bandwidth) and the position of the Fabry-Perot modes1.
+ Specifying a nonzero value for the gain curve frequency offset parameter
GainPeakFrequency.
+ Using ChirpReferenceCarrierDensity in combination with the Mate-
rialLinewidthEnhancementFactor, α, to shift the lasing cavity modes.
The ChirpReferenceCarrierDensity is the carrier density value at
which the effective refractive index in the laser cavity is equal to the spec-
ified waveguide group effective index (the refractive index depends on the
carrier density via the linewidth enhancement factor). For the nominal
operation mentioned above, the ChirpReferenceCarrierDensity
should be set at the calculated threshold carrier density.
• For a DFB laser the wavelength is nominally determined the grating strength, κ,
the grating stopband frequency, the laser length and the facet phase. A DFB’s
wavelength may be shifted by:
+ Specifying a nonzero value for the frequency offset parameter Grating-
StopbandFrequency. The GainPeakFrequency can also be moved.
+ Using ChirpReferenceCarrierDensity in combination with the Mate-
rialLinewidthEnhancementFactor, α. The ChirpReferenceCar-
rierDensity is the carrier density value at which the effective refractive
index in the laser cavity is equal to the specified waveguide group effec-
tive index (the refractive index depends on the carrier density via the lin-
ewidth enhancement factor). For the nominal operation mentioned above,
the ChirpReferenceCarrierDensity should be set at the calculated
threshold carrier density.
When using more than one laser/SOA in a simulation, always ensure that the wave-
length parameter is set within the modelled bandwidth for all devices, otherwise the
photon energy may be calculated incorrectly.
Proprietary laser parameters
The material characteristics of the laser is modelled using two Lorentzian filters,
one for the spontaneous and one for the stimulated emission. The response of these
filters are determined by the bandwidth parameters and the center frequency pa-
rameters, all of which are functions of carrier density.
1. For Fabry Perot lasers, the material gain peak will nominally coincide with one of the longitudinal
modes of the Fabry-Perot cavity (at threshold), and the average output spectrum will have a single
dominant mode. This is explained in more detail in the Component Designer User’s Manual.
.CUGT
Further details on the laser model can be found in the description of the TLLM mod-
el in the Component Designer User’s Manual.
Reception of a block-mode signal on any of the optical or electrical ports will cause a
fatal error.
Signal Representation: Individual Sample
This module processes only sample-mode tokens sampled at rates given by the glo-
bal simulation parameter SampleModeBandwidth. Reception of samples at any
other rate will cause a fatal error.
Multiple Runs: Memory for storing the scattering matrix cascade representing the
laser as well as the field amplitudes is allocated and initialized. Values of the inter-
nal field amplitudes are preserved between runs.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: All data are lost and the memory
to hold the laser’s scattering matrices and internal fields is released. New memory
is allocated and new scattering matrices are initialized ready for the new simulation
i.e. the laser object is destroyed and a new one recreated in its place.
Error Indications and Warnings
The module assumes that the sampling rate is set to the ONSL global simulation at-
tribute SampleModeBandwidth and will throw a fatal error if it detects samples
at rates other than this quantity.
The module will also throw errors on receipt of ONSL signal tokens with either
block (as opposed to sample) mode representation or periodic (not aperiodic) bound-
ary conditions.
References
[1] A.J.Lowery, 'A new dynamic semiconductor laser model based on the transmis-
sion line modeling method', IEE Proc.J., Optoelectron., vol.134, pp.281-289,
1987
[2] A.W.Snyder and J.D.Love, ‘Optical Waveguide Theory’, Chs. 12&13, Chapman
and Hall, London, 1983
4-
1RVKECN/QFWNCVQTU
Modulator Mach-Zehnder 4-3
/QFWNCVQT/CEJ<GJPFGT
/QFWNCVQT/< 1RVKECN/QFWNCVQTU
Purpose
The module simulates a Mach-Zehnder modulator and can take into account a fre-
quency chirp resulting from the modulator asymmetry.
Inputs
carrier = optical carrier
data = electrical modulation signal

Outputs
output = modulated optical signal
Physical Parameters
Extinction ε dB real yes [0,∞[ 30.0
extinction ratio
SymmetryFactor k — real yes [−1,1[ -1.0
symmetry factor of the modula-
tor determining the frequency
chirp
ChirpSign σ — enum no POSITIVE, POSITIVE
Active — — enum no ON, ON
Description
Figure 1 shows a schematic of the traveling-wave Mach-Zehnder Modulator (MZM).
Figure 1. Mach-Zehnder modulator.
The optical power Pout at the output of MZM, depends on the phase difference ∆Φ
between the two modulator branches
Pout ( t ) = Pin ( t ) ⋅ d ( t ) = P in ( t ) ⋅ cos 2 [ ∆Φ ( t ) ] (1)
with
∆Φ 1 ( t ) – ∆Φ 2 ( t )
∆Φ ( t ) = -------------------------------------------
2
where d(t) is the power transfer function and ∆Φ1(t) and ∆Φ2(t) are the phase chang-
es in each branch caused by the applied modulation signal data(t). The phase chang-
es take place due to the electro-optical effect. Requiring a power extinction ratio of
fextinct =dmax/dmin (see Figure 2) and assuming a “quadrature” operating point (the
bias phase shift of ∆ΦQP =π/4), the dependence of the phase difference ∆Φ(t) on the
electrical input data signal data(t) is given by
π 1
∆Φ = ---  --- – ext ⋅  data(t) – --- 
1 4
with ext = 1 – --- arctan(1 ⁄ ( f extinct )) . (2)
2 2   2  π
The extinction ratio can be specified in dB units according to ε=10 log(fextinct) by set-
ting the parameter Extinction.
d(∆Φ)
dmax
0.5
dmin
0 π/4 π/2 ∆Φ
Figure 2. MZM power transfer function.
In addition to the modulation of the signal power, the MZ modulator can exhibit
transient chirping at the edges of a modulation pulse. The total phase change
∆Θ(t)=(∆Φ1(t)+∆Φ2(t))/2 occurs at the modulator output if the individual phase
changes of the modulator branches are not anti-symmetrical, i.e., if
∆Φ 1 ( t ) ≠ – ∆Φ 2 ( t ) . To characterize the chirp behaviour of the MZM, the parameter
SymmetryFactor k is used, see [2]:
∆Φ 2
k = ----------- for ∆Φ 2 ≤ ∆Φ 1 . (3)
∆Φ 1
In general, k may assume any value within [−1,1[: A value of k=−1 results in ideal
intensity modulation, whereas k−>1 corresponds to ideal phase modulation. Note,
that in the latter case, ∆Φ=0, and the operation of the modulator at the quadrature
point with ∆Φbias=π/4, is impossible. For this reason, the value of k=+1 is excluded
from the valid parameter range of SymmetryFactor. Please use the module Modu-
lator Phase for the phase modulation.
The direction of the frequency chirp is determined by the sign of parameter
ChirpSign σ:
 ∆Φ 1 + ∆Φ 2
ChirpSign ≡ σ ≡ sgn  ----------------------------- (4)
 ∆Φ 1 – ∆Φ 2 
(see [2]).
Using (1), (3), and (4), the electrical field of the output signal can be finally written
as
1+k
jσ ------------- ∆Φ ( t )
Eout ( t ) = Ein ( t ) ⋅ d ( t ) ⋅ e 1 – k
(5)
= Ein ( t ) ⋅ d ( t ) ⋅ e j∆Θ ( t )
The chirping behavior of modulators is often characterized by the “α-factor” [1] de-
fined as the ratio of phase and intensity changes of the output signal
d∆Θ
------------
dt
α ≡ 2 ------------------------------- (6)
dP out
1 - --------------
---------- -
P out dt
From (1),(5) it follows that for our model of MZM the α-factor is given by
1+k 1
α = – σ ------------- ----------------------------- (7)
1 – k tan ∆Φ bias
Since the operating point is set to ∆Φbias=π/4 the expression above reads
1+k
α = – σ ------------- (8)
1–k
An arbitrary polarization state is allowed for the input optical signal. The output po-
larization is the same as the input one.
Multiple Bands: Each frequency band is processed in the time domain according to
(5). If the electrical and optical input signals have different sample rates, the signal
that has the lower sample rate is upsampled.
Parameterized Signals: The average power transmission of the modulator is calcu-
lated according to (1) and used to update the power of parameterized signals:
T
1
Pout = Pin ⋅ ----
T ∫ d ( t ) dt , (9)
0
where Pin and Pout are the input and output powers of the parameterized signals,
and T is the simulation TimeWindow (global simulation parameter). Note that (9)
is an approximation since the actual attenuation of the modulator depends on the
overlap of the patterns of the optical and electrical input signals. The expression (9)
becomes exact for modulation of the CW signals, or if the optical and electrical input
patterns are completely uncorrelated.
Noise Bins: The noise power is adjusted according to (9) to take into account atten-
uation introduced by the modulation process.
Module Deactivation: If parameter Active is OFF, the optical input signals will be
passed through the module without any changes.
Comments
The external Mach-Zehnder Modulator (MZM) can be used to overcome the undes-
ired dynamical effects in the directly modulated lasers (e.g., the laser chirp).
If parameter ChirpSign is positive, the front edge of the output pulse experiences a
negative deviation, whereas the trailing edge a positive deviation of the instant fre-
quency. In optical fibers with anomalous dispersion the waves with higher carrier
frequency propagate with a higher velocity. Thus, the positive ChirpSign leads to a
pulse compression in the beginning of the fiber.
References
[1] FUMIO KOYAMA, KENICHI IGA: Frequency Chirping in External Modulator.
Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 6, No. 1, Jan. 1988.
[2] GERHARD WENKE, MARKUS KIMMEK: Considerations of a Factor of Nonideal,
External Optical Mach-Zehnder Modulators. Journal of Optical
Communications 17 (1996), p. 2.
5-
9&//WNVKRNGZGTU
WDM MUX N-1 Ideal 5-3

WDM MUX 4-1 5-4
WDM DEMUX 1-4 5-7
Arrayed Waveguide Grating 1 to N 5-11
Arrayed Waveguide Grating N to 1 5-17
9&//7:0+FGCN
9&//7:0+FGCN
9&/A/7:A0AA+FGCN 9&//WNVKRNGZGTU
Purpose
The module multiplexes N optical WDM channels with an adjustable insertion loss-
es.
Inputs
input (multiple) = optical signal.
Outputs
output = multiplexed optical signal.
Physical Parameters
InsertionLoss Insertion loss for each — dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
channel.
Description
i1
i1
i2
i2
o1 o1
iN
iN
In this module, incoming channels are merged to a single channel.
The parameter InsertionLoss defines the additional attenuation between the in-
puts and the output. The N input signals are added into the output signal. This pro-
cess includes the joining of overlapping sampled bands (see System Designer User’s
Manual, Signal Representations, Multiple Frequency Bands, Joining Bands). The
new sampled band will also have 2n samples. If the new band overlaps with another
sampled band the joining process will be continued.
For a wavelength-independent coupler the minimum loss will be 10log10(N) dB. For
a wavelength-dependent multiplexer the minimum loss will be zero dB.
9&//7:
9&//7:
9&/A/7:AA 9&//WNVKRNGZGTU
Purpose
The module multiplexes four optical WDM channels. It is a galaxy which contains
four optical Bessel bandpass filters and an ideal multiplexer to combine the signals.
Inputs
i1 ... i4 = optical signal
Outputs
o1 = optical signal
Physical Parameters
Bandwidth 3dB bandwidth of ∆f3dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 4 * BitRat-
Bessel filters applied to each input eDefault
channel
InsertionLoss Insertion loss i-o dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
FilterOrder Order of the bessel fil- — — int no [0,100] 3
ter
CenterFrequency_Filter1 Center — Hz real yes ]−∞,∞[ 193.1e12+1.
frequency of Filter 1 5*Channel-
Spacing
Spacing
CenterFrequency_Filter3 Center — Hz real yes ]−∞,∞[ 193.1e12-0.
Spacing
Spacing
9&//7:
NoiseDynamic Maximum allowed — dB real no ]0,∞[ 3.0
ratio of noise "coloredness" with one
single bin
NoiseThreshold Maximum attenu- — dB real no ]0,∞[ -100
ation of spectral regions in which to
adapt noise bins
ActiveFilterBandwidth The band- — Hz real no [0,∞[ 1.0e12
width in which active filtering is done;
outside this range filtering is limited to
attenuation
DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwi — — enum no ON OFF
dth Define if to discard sampled
bands beyond the active filter band-
width
Active_Filter1 Defines if the Filter — — enum yes ON, OFF ON
1 is active or not
2 is active or not
3 is active or not
Active_Filter4 Defines if the Filter 4 — — enum yes ON, OFF ON
is active or not
ConserveMemory If on, the trans- — — enum no ON, OFF ON
fer function is internally stored, and
Description
i1
Filter 1
i1
i2 Att.
i2
i3 o1 Filter 2 o1
i4 i3
Filter 3
i4
Filter 4
9&//7:
A(f)
insertion loss i-o
Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4
fc,1 fc,2 fref fc,3 fc,4 f
Figure 1. Spectral plot
The input signals are filtered by the optical Bessel bandpass filters to suppress fre-
quency components outside the WDM channel. In the ideal multiplexer all signals
are added.
The parameters Bandwidth, FilterOrder, NoiseDynamic, NoiseThreshold,
ActiveFilterBandwidth, DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwidth, Conserve-
Memory, Active_Filter1 to Active_Filter4, and CenterFrequency_Filter1 to
CenterFrequency_Filter4 specify the characteristics of the optical Bessel band-
pass filters.
The filter transfer function is defined by the 3dB filter bandwidth, Bandwidth, and
the order of the Bessel function, FilterOrder. The center frequencies of the filters
can be set by the parameters CenterFrequency_Filter1 to
CenterFrequency_Filter4 (see spectral plot). NoiseDynamic specifies the maxi-
mum “coloredness” of noise within one single bin. NoiseThreshold is the minimum
power value below which noise bins are not adapted. The bandwidth of active filter-
ing is specified by ActiveFilterBandwidth. Outside this range, filtering is limited
to attenuation. Frequency components of sampled bands beyond the ActiveFilter-
Bandwidth can be discarded by DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwidth.
Active_Filter1 to Active_Filter4 activate or switch off the filters. The parameter
ConserveMemory defines the memory management in the filter module. This in-
fluences the computation speed and memory usage. If ConserveMemory is
switched to ON, the filter’s transferfunction is stored and can be used on repetitive
calls. InsertionLoss specifies an additional attenuation between inputs and out-
put.
For a detailed description of the functions of the modules and the signal representa-
tion please see the manual pages of Filter Bessel (Optical) (page 8-16) and WDM
MUX N-1 Ideal (page 5-3).
Comments
The default values of the center frequencies of the filters are the center frequency of
the optical band (e.g. 193,1THz) plus multiples of the channel spacing, which has to
be provided as global parameter (ChannelSpacing) or can be replaced by a numer-
ical value.
9&/&'/7:
9&/&'/7:
9&/A&'/7:AA 9&//WNVKRNGZGTU
Symbol
Purpose
The module demultiplexes four WDM channels. It is a galaxy which contains four
optical Bessel bandpass filters, an ideal attenuator and a logical fork to split the sig-
nal.
Inputs
i1 = optical signal
Outputs
o1... o4 = optical signal
Physical Parameters
Bandwidth 3dB bandwidth of ∆f3dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 4 * BitRat-
Bessel filters applied to each input eDefault
channel
InsertionLoss Insertion loss i-o dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
FilterOrder Order of the bessel fil- — — int no [0,100] 3
ter.
Spacing
Spacing
Spacing
Spacing
9&/&'/7:
single bin.
NoiseThreshold Maximum attenu- — dB real no ]−∞,0[ -100
ation of spectral regions in which noise
bins are adapted.
ActiveFilterBandwidth Band- — Hz real no [0,∞[ 1.0e12
attenuation.
DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwi — — enum no ON, OFF
dth Define if to discard sampled OFF
bands beyond the active filter band-
width.
Active_Filter1 Defines if the Filter — — enum yes ON, ON
1 is active or not OFF
Active_Filter4 Defines if the Filter 4 — — enum yes ON, ON
is active or not OFF
ConserveMemory If ON, the transfer — — enum no ON, ON
function is stored, and may be reused OFF
on consecutive runs
Description
o1
Filter 1
o1
Att. o2
o2
i1 o3 i1 Filter 2
o4 o3
Filter 3
o4
Filter 4
9&/&'/7:
Spectral plot:
A(f)
insertion loss i−o
Filter 1 Filter 2 Filter 3 Filter 4
fc,1 fc,2 fc,3 fc,4 f
Performance:
The input signal is split into four components, which are filtered by the optical
Bessel bandpass filters to suppress frequency components outside the WDM chan-
nel.
The parameters Bandwidth, FilterOrder, NoiseDynamic, NoiseThreshold,
ChannelPowerThreshold, ActiveFilterBandwidth, DownsampleToActive-
FilterBandwidth, ConserveMemory, Active_Filter1 to Active_Filter4, and
CenterFrequency_Filter1 to CenterFrequency_Filter4 specify the used optical
Bessel bandpass filters characteristics.
The filter transfer function is defined by the 3dB filter bandwidth, Bandwidth, and
the order of the Bessel function, FilterOrder. The center frequencies of the filters
can be set by the parameters CenterFrequency_Filter1 to
CenterFrequency_Filter4 (see spectral plot). NoiseDynamic specifies the maxi-
mum ”coloredness” of noise within one single bin. NoiseThreshold is the minimum
power value below which noise bins are not adapted. ChannelPowerThreshold
defines the minimum power below which channels are discarded after filtering. The
bandwidth of active filtering is specified by ActiveFilterBandwidth. Outside this
range filtering is limited to attenuation. Frequency components of sampled bands
beyond the ActiveFilterBandwidth can be discarded by DownsampleToActive-
FilterBandwidth. Active_Filter1 to Active_Filter4 activate or switch off the fil-
ters. The parameter ConserveMemory defines the memory management in the
filter module. This influences the computation speed and memory usage. If Con-
serveMemory is switched to ON, the filter’s transferfunction is stored and can be
used on repetitive calls.
InsertionLoss specifies an additional attenuation between inputs and output at
the center frequencies of the filters (see spectral plot).
For a detailed description of the functions of the modules and the signal representa-
tion please see the manual pages of Filter Bessel (Optical) (page 8-16).
Comments
The default values of the center frequencies of the filters are the center frequency of
the optical band (e.g. 193,1THz) plus multiples of the channel spacing, which has to
9&/&'/7:
be provided as global parameter (ChannelSpacing) or can be replaced by a numer-

ical value.
#TTC[GF9CXGIWKFG)TCVKPIVQ0
#9)AA0 9&//WNVKRNGZGTU
Purpose
The module demultiplexes N WDM channels by modeling an arrayed waveguide
grating demultiplexer.
Inputs
input = optical signal
Outputs
output (multiple)=optical signal
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency Center frequency fc Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
of the AWG.
LossAtCenterFrequency Loss at dB real yes ]0,∞[ 3.0
the center frequency.
FreeSpectralRange Free spectral ∆λFSR Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 2.5e12
range of the AWG.
ChannelSpacing Frequency spac- ∆λ Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 100.0e9
ing of adjacent channels.
NumberOfChannels Number of — int yes ]0,∞[ 8
WDM channels.
WaveguideWidth Width of the wwg m real yes ]0,∞[ 2.0e-6
waveguide.
SlabModeIndex Index of refraction nslab — real yes ]0,∞[ 3.3
for the slab mode (3.3 for GaAs).
NormalizedPropConst Normalized b — real yes ]0,∞[ 0.8
propagation constant
InputOutputWaveguidesSep dr m real yes ]0,∞[ 3.0e-6
Distance between in- or output
waveguides
ArrayedWaveguidesSep da m real yes ]0,∞[ 0.5e-6
Distance between ajacent array
waveguides
RandomPhaseNoise Random — deg real yes [0,∞[ 10.0
behavior of phase
NoiseDynamic Maximum allowed — dB real yes ]0,∞[ 1.0
ratio of noise “coloredness” with one
single bin
NoiseThreshold Maximum attenua- — dB real yes ]−∞,0[ -100
tion of spectral regions in which to
adapt noise bins
DigitalFilterOrder The order of a — — int no [8,1024]a 64
FIR filter employed for aperiodic simu-
lation.
ConserveMemory If on, the transfer — — enum no ON, ON
function is calculated and reused on OFF
consecutive runs
Description
A phased-array (de)multiplexer is an N×N wavelength filter consisting of two star
couplers connected by an array of waveguides of increasing length. The response of
a phased-array is described by a number of parameters, including the center fre-
quency (parameter CenterFrequency), the free spectral range (spacing between
the diffraction orders — parameter FreeSpectralRange), the channel spacing (pa-
rameter ChannelSpacing) and the number of in- and outputs (parameter Num-
berOfChannels). Using a Gaussian approximation of the modal field in the
waveguides, the transmission through a phased array (de)multiplexer can be de-
scribed by [1]:
M–1
j [ βs Ra ( 1 + φp αm ) ] j [ βg L m ] j [ β s Ra( 1 + αm φq ) ]
t p, q = ∑ Ap e e Aq e ,
m=0
with
β s w 0 ∆α –[ βs w 0 αm ⁄ 2 ] 2 –[ β s w0 φi ⁄ 2 ] 2
Ai = ---------------------e e .
2π
Lm =m∆L+L0 is the length of the array arms, with ∆L the length difference between
two adjacent array waveguides. αm =(m−(M−1)/2)∆α is the angle of the array
waveguides at the starcoupler, with ∆α the angular spacing between adjacent array
waveguides, Ra is the focal length, βg and βs the propagation constants in the
waveguides and the starcoupler, respectively. w0 is the width of the waveguide
mode and M is the total number of array waveguides. φi is the angular position of
the ith in- or output. From the FreeSpectralRange ∆λFSR the order ν of the
phased-array follows as ν=int(λc /∆λFSR). Consequently, the focal length Ra is given
by
N slab d a dr
Ra = --------------------------- ,
ν∆λ
with Nslab the effective index in the starcoupler, da and dr the distance between ad-
jacent array waveguides and in- or output waveguides, respectively. ∆λ is the chan-
nel spacing. The length difference between two adjacent array waveguides is given
by νλc /Ng. Using the Gaussian far-field width θ0 of the input waveguide, the num-
ber of waveguides in the array needed to collect the diffracted field is calculated as
4θ0
M = int  --------- + 1
 ∆α 
Waveguide structure
The PHASAR response is determined also by the waveguide structure used. In or-
der to describe the waveguide structure without going in too much detail, but still
taking the essential properties into account for the PHASAR design, the following
approach is used:
The user has to input these values:
• the waveguide width wwg (parameter WaveGuideWidth): normal values are
2µm for InP based waveguides and 6µm for glass based waveguides.
• the normalized propagation constant b (parameter NormalizedPropConst):
good values are 0.8 for slightly multimode high contrast waveguide (InP), and 0.6
for single mode low contrast waveguide (glass).
• the slab-mode index nslab (parameter SlabModeIndex): normal values are 3.3
for InP based waveguides and to 1.44 for glass waveguides. This is the index of
the slab mode of the waveguide (as if the waveguide were infinitely wide).
• the separation between the waveguides at the input and output of the PHASAR
(dr — parameter InputOutputWaveguideSep). A small separation gives high
crosstalk, and a large separation makes a large device. A reasonable value is 1.5
times the waveguide width.
• the separation between the waveguides in the array (da) at the position of the
starcoupler (parameter ArrayedWaveguideSep). A small separation gives the
lowest loss. This is limited largely by the fabrication process used. For InP based
waveguides this can be 0.5 µm and for glass waveguides 6µm. In the current mod-
el, the loss is not affected by this parameter, but it does influence the size of the
PHASAR and therefore the overall phase change.
• the central channel insertion loss (parameter LossAtCenterFrequency). The
normalization is done in such a way, that the central channel has zero insertion
loss. This parameter adds a certain loss to all channels. Note that in a phasar
with an even number of input and output waveguides, the central channel is not
present.
The V-parameter (normalized waveguide thickness) follows from b:1
1. All calculations are for TE polarized light only. The waveguide is assumed to be symmetrical and only
the fundamental mode is taken into account. The equations are only valid under these restrictions.
b
2 atan ------------
1 –b
V = ---------------------------------- .
1–b
The effective index contrast ∆n follows from
2
1  Vλ 0 
∆n = ----------------  ------------------ ,
2nslab  2πw wg
with λ0 the vacuum (central) wavelength. The mode index of the fundamental mode
is given by
2
Neff = ( n slab – ∆n ) + b ( 2nslab ∆n ) .
From V and b follows the effective width of the beam

w wg
weff = -----------  1 + ------------ ,
2
2  V b
which can be approximated by a Gaussian beam (Cexp (−x2/w02)) with
2
w0 = w eff --- ,
π
and the opening angle of the far field is
λ
sin θ0 = ------------------------ .
πw0 nslab
The total device length is determined by the minimum bending radius for the
curved waveguides in the waveguide array, as well. From nslab and ∆n, an estimate
for the minimum bending radius with low loss [2] follows:
  2 1.54 
 ( n slab – ∆n )  
Rmin = 30 ⁄  k0 n slab  1 – ---------------------------------- .
 2 
  n slab  
 

Multiple Bands: Each spectral band is filtered separately with the appropriate fil-
ter transfer function.
Parameterized Signals: Power information of parameterized signals is changed ac-
cording to the value of the filter’s transfer function, evaluated at the center frequen-
cy of the respective signal.
Noise Bins: The module’s behavior, with respect to the noise signal carried, is mod-
ified using the parameters NoiseDynamic and NoiseThreshold, respectively.
Noise bins are resized in bandwidth if two conditions are satisfied: (1) The dynamic
of the filters’s transfer function (i.e., the logarithmic ratio of its maximum to mini-
mum value) exceeds parameter NoiseDynamic. (2) The attenuation of the filter in
the spectral region of the bin does not exceed the value specified by parameter
NoiseThreshold.
Interactions between differently represented signals: No interaction between spec-
tral components of the input signal is considered, since the filter module acts as a
pure linear device.
Multiple Runs: If parameter ConserveMemory is set to ON, the filter’s transfer
function is calculated once, then re-used each time the module is executed. Other-
wise, the transfer function will be evaluated each run.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: If the simulation is reset, data
stored by the module (e.g., coefficients) will be lost.
Comments
For correct functionality, the appropriate bus has to be attached to the AWG_1_N in
order to fix the sequence of output channels. The channel with the lowest carrier
frequency must be connected to the first Bus Split output, and so forth. The bus
width has to be specified with the Bus Marker. If the number of channels
exceeds 14, the Ptolemy star BusSplit is necessary.
1
2
3
N/2
N/2+1
Acknowledgement
This module was implemented in cooperation with Xaveer Leijtens from Delft Uni-
versity of Technology, Faculty of Information Technology and Systems.
References
[1] M. SMIT, C. VAN DAM, ‘‘PHASAR-based WDM-devices: principles, design and
applications,’’ J. of Sel. Topics in Quantum Electron., vol. 2, pp.236−250, June
1996.
[2] E. PENNINGS, Bends in Optical Ridge Waveguides, Modeling and Experiments.
PhD thesis, Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands, 1990.
ISBN 90-9003413-7.
#TTC[GF9CXGIWKFG)TCVKPI0VQ
#9)A0A 9&//WNVKRNGZGTU
Purpose
The module multiplexes N channels to a single WDM channel by modeling an ar-
rayed waveguide grating multiplexer.
Inputs
Outputs
output = electrical signal
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency Center frequency — Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
of the AWG.
LossAtCenterFrequency Loss at — dB real yes ]0,∞[ 3.0
the center frequency.
FreeSpectralRange Free spectral — Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 2.5e12
range of the AWG.
ChannelSpacing Frequency spac- — Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 100.0e9
ing of adjacent channels.
NumberOfChannels Number of — — int yes ]0,∞[ 8
WDM channels.
WaveguideWidth Width of the — m real yes ]0,∞[ 2.0e-6
waveguide.
SlabModeIndex Index of refraction — — real yes ]0,∞[ 3.3
for the slab mode (3.3 for GaAs).
NormalizedPropConst Normal- — — real yes ]0,∞[ 0.8
ized propagation constant.
InputOutputWaveguidesSep — m real yes ]0,∞[ 3.0e-6
ArrayedWaveguidesSep — m real yes ]0,∞[ 0.5e-6
RandomPhaseNoise Random — deg real no [0,∞[ 10.0
behavior of phase.
NoiseDynamic The maximum — dB real yes ]0,∞[ 1.0
allowed ratio of noise “coloredness”
with one single bin.
NoiseThreshold The maximum — dB real yes ]−∞,0[ -100
attenuation of spectral regions in which
to adapt noise bins.
DigitalFilterOrder The order of a — — int no [8,1024]a 64
lation.
function is calculated and reused on OFF
consecutive runs
Description
For the description of parameters and model, please refer to module AWG_1_N.
Multiple Bands: Each spectral band is filtered separately with the appropriate fil-
ter transfer function.
NoiseThreshold.
pure linear device.
Module Deactivation: Not possible.
Comments
For correct functionality, the appropriate bus has to be attached to the AWG_1_N in
order to fix the sequence of output channels. The channel with the lowest carrier
frequency must be connected to the first Bus Split output, and so forth. The bus
width has to be specified with the Bus Marker. If the number of channels
exceeds 14, the Ptolemy star BusSplit is necessary.
1
2
3
N/2
N/2+1
Acknowledgement
This module was implemented in cooperation with Xaveer Leijtens from Delft Uni-
versity of Technology, Faculty of Information Technology and Systems.
References
[1] M. SMIT, C. VAN DAM, ‘‘PHASAR-based WDM-devices: principles, design and
applications,’’ J. of Sel. Topics in Quantum Electron., vol. 2, pp.236−250, June
1996.
[2] E. PENNINGS, Bends in Optical Ridge Waveguides, Modeling and Experiments.
PhD thesis, Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands, 1990.
ISBN 90-9003413-7.
6-
(KDGTU
Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber (NLS) 6-3

Fiber NLS Random Birefringence PMD (Coarse Step) 6-15
0QPNKPGCT&KURGTUKXG(KDGT
0.5
0.5
(KDGT0.5 (KDGTU
Purpose
The module solves the nonlinear Schrödinger (NLS) equation describing the propa-
gation of linearly polarized optical waves in fibers using the split-step Fourier meth-
od. The model takes into account stimulated Raman scattering (SRS), four-wave
mixing (FWM), self-phase modulation (SPM), cross-phase modulation (XPM), first
order group-velocity dispersion (GVD), second order GVD and attenuation of the fi-
ber. For parametrized signals (CW representation) an ordinary differential equation
system taking into account stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) and frequency de-
pended attenuation is applied.
Inputs
Outputs
output = optical signal
Physical Parameters
ReferenceFrequency fref Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
reference frequency for
the specified parameters
Length — m real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e3
fiber length
Attenuation a dB/m real yes [0,10⋅10−2]w 0.2e-3
fiber attenuation
AttFileName — — file- yes — ""
file for attenuation vs. fre- name
quency
Dispersion Dλ s/m2 real yes [−500⋅10−6,500⋅10−6] 16e-6
w
dispersion coefficient
DispersionSlope Sλ s/m3 real yes [−103,103]w 0.08e3
slope of the dispersion
coefficient
NonLinearIndex n2 m2/W real yes [0,20⋅10−20]w 2.6e-20
nonlinear refractive index [−50⋅10−20,50⋅10−20]a
CoreArea Aeff m2 real yes ]0,10−7]w 80.0e-12
effective core area ]0,∞[a
0.5
τ1 −15 −15 a
Tau1 s real yes [10 ,50⋅10 ] 12.2e-15
first adjustable parame-
ter for Raman response
function
Tau2 τ2 s real yes [10−15,50⋅10−15]a 32.0e-15
second adjustable param-
eter for Raman response
function
RamanCoefficient fr — real yes [0,1]a 0.0
fractional contribution of
the delayed Raman
response
MaxStepWidth ∆zmax m real yes ]0,∞[a 1.0e3
maximum of the step
width
MaxPhaseChange ∆φnl deg real yes ]0,30]w 0.05
maximum phase change ]0,∞[a
FiberParts — — int yes [1,109]a 10
number of fiber parts in
which the integration is
subdivided
MaxStepsNumber — — int yes [1,109]a 1e6
maximum number of inte-
gration steps for one fiber
part
RelativeAccuracy — — real yes [10−20,10−1]a 1e-6
required accuracy of the
ODE solver computations
InitialStepWidth — — real yes [10−15,10−9]a 1e-12
first step width used for
ODE solver
MinimumStepWidth — — real yes [0,10−9]a 0.0
minimum allowed step
size for ODE computa-
tions
SymmetricSplitStep — — enum yes NO, NO
defines if a symmetric YES
split-step algorithm is
used
0.5
JoinSignalBands — — enum yes NO, YES
defines if all sampled sig- YES
nal bands are joined into
one signal band.
AddNoiseBinsToSignal — — enum yes NO, YES
defines if noise bins are YES
incorporated into signal
bands (if applicable)
ConvertToParametrize — — enum yes NO, NO
d YES
defines if the fiber is com-
puted with parametrized
signal representation
ControlFlag — — enum yes 0, 0
debugging level; defines if 1,
output is displayed and 2
debug files are produced
defines if the module is OFF
active or not
Description of the split-step Fourier implementation

The generalized nonlinear Schrödinger equation describing a propagation of signals
in optical fibers is given by
∂E(z, t) ˆ +N
ˆ ] ⋅ E(z, t) ,
------------------- = [ D (1)
∂z
2
where E(z, t) denotes the electric field of the light wave, E(z, t) characterizes its
power, N̂ is the nonlinearity operator, and D̂ is the dispersion operator. The latter
can be written as
β2 ∂ 2 β3 ∂ 3 α
ˆ = j -----
D - + ------ + --- , (2)
2 ∂t2 6 ∂t3 2
where β2 [s2/m] describes the first order group-velocity dispersion (GVD), β3 [s3/m]
the second order GVD and α [1/m] the attenuation constant. The Attenuation pa-
rameter a [dB/m] is related to α according to a = α ⋅ 10 log e . First and second order
GVD, β2 and β3, can be expressed in terms of the dispersion coefficient (parameter
Dispersion) Dλ and its slope Sλ =dDλ/dλ (parameter DispersionSlope):
2
λ
β 2 = – ---------- D λ , (3)
2πc
2
λ 2
β 3 = ----------------- ( λ Sλ + 2λDλ ) . (4)
2
( 2πc )
0.5
Note that the dispersion coefficient Dλ has to be given in SI units [s/m2 =

106 ps/(km⋅nm)].
If stimulated Raman scattering should not be included in the simulation (parameter
RamanCoefficient = 0) the nonlinear operator N̂ is simply given by
ˆ = – jγ E(z, t) 2 2 π n 2 f ref
N with γ = ----------------------- (5)
cA eff
and depends on the nonlinear index n2 (parameter NonlinearIndex), effective

CoreArea Aeff, as well as on the reference frequency fref and the velocity of light in
vacuum c.
The step size
∆φ nl
∆z φ = ---------------------- (6)
2
γ E(z) pk
is determined by a maximum acceptable phase shift ∆φnl (MaxPhaseChange),

which should be quantified in the range of 0,06…0,2degree for the peak value of op-
tical power E(z) 2pk . If the optical field E consists of more than one carrier, then the
phase mismatch between the carrier frequencies has to be taken into account for the
step size control. Therefore, a maximum step size ∆zmax can be specified by Max-
StepWidth. The resultant step size ∆z, is the minimum of ∆zφ and ∆zmax. Assuming
a propagation of optical signals in +z direction and a symmetrical split-step algo-
rithm (parameter SymmetricSplitStep is set to YES), the mathematical formalism
of the procedure can be described according to [1] as follows:
ˆ ˆ
E(z0 + ∆z, t ) = exp  ∆z ⋅ ---- [ exp ( ∆zN̂ )E(z0, t) ] exp  ∆z ⋅ ---- .
D D
(7)
2 2
If the parameter SymmetricSplitStep is set to NO, equation (7) changes to
ˆ ).
E(z0 + ∆z, t ) = [ exp ( ∆zN̂ )E(z 0, t) ] exp ( ∆z ⋅ D (8)
The nonlinearity operator N̂ is applied on the field at locus z0. Therefore, the exact
dependence of operator N̂ on the time-dependent amplitude in the interval ∆z is re-
placed by its start value
2 2
N̂(ξ) = –jγ E ( z0 + ξ, t ) ≈ –jγ E ( z 0, t ) , ξ ∈ [ z0, z0 + ∆z[ . (9)
The parameter AttFileName can be used to specify a file that contains the Attenu-
ation parameter [dB/m] vs. the frequency [Hz]. The file format is as follows:
193e12 0.2e-3
193.1e12 0.2e-3
193.2e12 0.2e-3
If the parameter RamanCoefficient is set unequal to zero, the nonlinearity opera-

tor N̂ is extended to [2]
0.5
∞
ˆ = –jγ ( 1 – f ) E(z, t) 2 – jγ f h ( τ ) E(z, t – τ) 2 dτ ,
N r r∫ r (10)
0
where f r (parameter RamanCoefficient) represents the fractional contribution of
the delayed Raman response hr ( t ) which is approximated by
2 2
τ1 + τ 2
h r ( t ) = ----------------- exp  – ----- sin  ----- , t > 0.
t t
(11)
2  τ   τ 1
τ 1 τ2 2
In (11) τ 1 (parameter Tau1) and τ 2 (parameter Tau2) are two adjustable pa-
rameters to provide a good fit to the Raman-gain spectrum. Their commonly used
values are τ 1 = 12.2 fs , τ 2 = 32 fs .
To speed up calculation, the implementation of this fiber model supports multiple
threads. To see more information about computation parameters, set the parameter
ControlFlag to 1 or 2. By default (0) no additional information is printed.
Description of the 4th order Runge-Kutta computation
For parametrized signals and noise bins the effect of stimulated Raman scattering
can be described by the following system of ordinary differential equations
dA i α 2
---------- = – -----i A i – jf r γ
dz 2 ∑ ˜ ( f – f )) ,
A i A m jIm ( R i m
m≠i
(12)
dN k α 2
----------- = – -----k- N k – jf r γ ∑ N k Ai jIm ( R
˜ (f – f )) ,
k i
dz 2
i, k
where Ai is the amplitude of the ith prametrized signal, Nk is the amplitude of the
kth noise bin, and αi, αk are representing their attenuation coefficients, respective-
ly. In (12), fr describes the fractional contribution of the delayed Raman response to
the nonlinearity coefficient γ, and Im ( R ˜ ( f – f ) ) represents the imaginary part of
i m
the Fourier transformed Raman response function at the frequency difference be-
tween the parametrized signals (fi −fm). In the second equation, Im ( R ˜ ( f – f ) ) de-
i m
notes the imaginary part of the Fourier transformed Raman response function at
the frequency difference between the noise bins and the parametrized signals. This
system of ordinary differential equations is solved using a 4th order Runge-Kutta
equation solver. The parameters MaxStepsNumber, MaxPhaseChange, Rela-
tiveAccuracy, InitialStepWidth, MinimumStepwidth are used to configure the
equation solver. The parameter FiberParts can be used to subdivide the fiber
length into different parts. For each of these parts the integration algorithm is re-
started again.
(1) If the parameter ConvertToParametrized is set to NO, the fiber is computed
as follows:
0.5
Multiple Bands: If JoinSignalBands is set to NO, multiple bands are computed

without interactions between the bands. Otherwise, all multiple bands are joined to
one sampled band. The bands are computed using the above described split-step
Fourier method.
Parameterized Signals: are attenuated. If ConvertToParametrized is set to NO,
no interaction is implemented between the sampled bands and the parametrized
signals.
Noise Bins: are attenuated if AddNoiseBinsToSignal is set to NO. Otherwise, the
noise is added to the sampled bands.
(2) If the parameter ConvertToParametrized is set to YES, the fiber is comput-
ed as follows:
Multiple Bands: The sampled bands are converted to parametrized signals (s.b.).
Parameterized Signal: Are computed solving the above described system of ordi-
nary differential equations using a 4th order Runge-Kutta equation solver.
Noise Bins: Are attenuated if AddNoiseBinsToSignal is set to NO. Otherwise,
the system of ordinary differential equations is extended by the required equations
representing the interaction between noise bins and parametrized signals (s.a.).
Multiple Runs: Reinitialization is performed after each run.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: Reinitialization is performed.
Reset during Simulation: Reinitialization is performed.
Validation
This section is intended to prove the agreement of known theoretical predictions for
optical fibers with the numerical results obtained with Photonic Transmission De-
sign Suite modules. Since there are numerous theoretical aspects to compare with
the behaviour of computational applications, a choice of two test runs has been
made focusing on both the nonlinear and dispersive properties implemented in the
module “Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber (NLS)”.
The two test runs explained below concentrate on the temporal and/or spectral evo-
lution of single pulses in single channels. The corresponding setups are included in
Photonic Transmission Design Suite, so that the test runs may be repeated with
changed parameters.
(1) Spectral broadening of a Gaussian pulse due to Self-Phase Modula-
tion (SPM)
a) Theory: It is known [2], that in the limit of β 2 = β 3 = 0 (no GVD) the nonlin-
ear Schrödinger equation becomes
∂U –j –αz 2
= ----------- e U U, (13)
∂z L NL
0.5
where the normalized amplitude U(z,τ) is related to the field amplitude A(z,τ) by
αz
– ------
2
A ( z, τ ) = P0e U ( z, τ ) . (14)
The nonlinear length LNL is introduced by

1
L NL = --------- , (15)
γP 0
where γ is defined as described above and P0 is the peak power of the Gaussian
pulse. The solution to (13) is given by
U ( z, T ) = U ( 0, T ) ⋅ exp ( –j φ NL ( z, T ) ) , (16)
with a phase argument
2 z eff
Φ NL ( z, T ) = U ( 0, T ) ⋅ ----------- . (17)
L NL
The effective fiber length zeff becomes zeff =z if α=0 (no fiber loss) is assumed. The
phase shift is time-dependent and gives rise to a frequency chirp δω(t). The latter is
given for a Gaussian pulse by
δω max ≅ 0 ,86 ∆ωΦ max , (18)
–1
where ∆ω = T0 is the spectral width of the initial pulse, and Φmax is the maxi-
mum phase shift which is reached at the pulse center [3]. The spectral broadening is
thus a function of the pulse power and the propagation length z.
b) Simulation: The simulation setup can be accessed from the demo collection.
Its most important parameters are:
1. PeakPower,
2. NonlinearIndex,
3. Length.
After every fiber length z = L NL , the maximum phase shift is increased by one ra-
dian which in turn gives rise to an interference pattern stemming from the superpo-
sition of the chirped pulse’s frequency components. The number of peaks in the
spectrum of the pulse M is approximately given by the relation
Φ max ≅  M – --- π .
1
(19)
 2
c) Results: The simulation has been performed with fiber lengths giving 0π, 0.5π,
…, 3.5π maximum phase shift. The spectral plots resulting from this simulation are
shown in Figure 1 and are in good agreement with [3].
0.5
0.6 0.6
0.5 Φmax = 0 0.5 Φmax = 0,5 π

0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
-50 0 50 -50 0 50
0.6 0.6
0.5 Φmax = 1,0 π 0.5 Φmax = 1,5 π

0.4 0.4
Power [mW]
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0-50
-50 0 50 0 50
0.6 0.6
0.5
Φmax = 2,5 π 0.5
Φmax = 3,5 π
0.4 0.4
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
0.1 0.1
0 0
-50 0 50 -50 0 50
Frequency [GHz]
Figure 1. Spectrum of a Gaussian pulse as it propagates along the Fiber (Simula-

tion Results).
Parameters used: SampleRate 1024e9, BitRate 1e9, Bits 1,
FWHM 1/(16*BitRate), PeakPower 0.1, PRBSType ONE.
(2) Temporal evolution of solitons

Solitons are of major interest in optical fiber communications. The term “soliton” re-
fers to special kinds of waves that can propagate undistorted over long distances
and remain unaffected after collision with each other. Ideal Solitons exist in fibers
with anomalous group-velocity dispersion (D>0, b2 <0, cf. (3)) and vanishing loss.
Solitons are well suited for functional tests of module Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber
(NLS), since both nonlinear and dispersive properties enter into the numerical sim-
ulation.
0.5
i) Fundamental soliton
a) Theory: The analytic solution representing solitons is obtained, e.g., applying
the inverse scattering method [2] [p. 142] to the nonlinear Schroedinger equation.
This method leads to a general solution for solitons of different orders. The funda-
mental soliton (first order) will propagate undistorted without change in shape for
arbitrarily long distances. A higher-order soliton exhibits an oscillating pattern of
its temporal and spectral evolution.These spatial variations are periodic with length
of z0 (soliton period) for solitons with an integer order.
A fundamental soliton is given by the analytic expression
U ( ξ, τ ) = sech ( τ ) exp ( – j ξ ⁄ 2 ) (20)
with the normalized field amplitude U(ξ,τ), cf. (14), and
A z T z
u = NU = N ----------- ; ξ = -------- , τ = ------- with T = t – ----- . (21)
P0 LD T0 vg
Here, N denotes the soliton order with

2
2 γP 0 T 0
N = ----------------- , (22)
β2
and LD reflects the dispersive length

2
T0
L D = --------- . (23)
β2
P0 refers to the peak power, T0 is given by TFWHM , and the approximate relation for
the pulse width (sech pulse)
T FWHM ≈ 1 ,76T 0 . (24)
For given values of γ and β2 and the pulse width TFWHM, the peak power of a soliton
of Nth order is thus uniquely defined.
b) Simulation: Propagation of first and second order solitons has been simulated
using the setup which uses a Pulse Sechant Transmitter, a Nonlinear Dispersive Fi-
ber (NLS) module, and visualizers for the time and frequency domain. The first-or-
der pulse should maintain its shape while propagating along the fiber. This has
been tested for up to 100 times the soliton period (approx. 10000km fiber length).
The results have been evaluated by comparing the data obtained from theSystem
Designer simulation with the analytical expression (20).
c) Results: The simulation data obtained for 0…5000km fiber length has been
found to agree quite well with (20). The pulse shapes for the numerical and theoret-
ical results are shown in Figure 3. No difference can be seen.
0.5
14
12
Power [mW] 10
0
0 0.5 1
Time [ns]
Figure 2. Pulse shape of a fundamental soliton after z=0km and z=5000km.
The following parameter settings have been used for the simulation:
SampleRate 1024e9 NonlinearIndex 2.6e-20
BitRate 1e9 CoreArea 80.0e-12
Bits 1 MaxStepWidth set to fiber length
ReferenceFrequency 193.1e12 MaxPhaseChange 0.05
Length varying, see text FWHM 1/(16*BitRate)
Attenuation 0 PeakPower (see text)
Dispersion 16.0e-6 DispersionSlope (see text)
The parameter Length was chosen according to multiples of the soliton period z0.
MaxStepWidth was set to the fiber length. To obtain a soliton of order N, the pa-
rameter PeakPower has to be set according to equation (22), depending on the set-
tings of the other parameters:
2 2
N ⋅ c 0 ⋅ Dispersion ⋅ CoreArea ⋅ 2 ⋅ log ( 1 + 2 )
PeakPower = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 3 2
( 2π ) NonlinearIndex ⋅ ReferenceFrequency ⋅ FWHM
. (25)
The parameter DispersionSlope has been adjusted so that the second order GVD
β3 vanishes:
c0 ⋅ DispersionSlope
- = – 2 ⋅ Dispersion .
------------------------------------------------------------ (26)
RefFrequency
0.5
ii) Second order Soliton

In contrast to the fundamental soliton, there is a periodical change in temporal
shape and spectrum of higher-order solitons due to propagation along the fiber. As
an example, a second order soliton is simulated using System Designer.
a) Theory: The periodic evolution of a higher-order soliton is ruled by the group
velocity dispersion β2 of the fiber and the pulse width T0. The analytic solution
found for the 2nd order soliton is given by
4 [ cosh ( 3 τ ) + 3 exp ( –j4 ξ ) cosh ( τ ) ] exp ( – j ξ ⁄ 2 )
u ( ξ, τ ) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- . (27)
cosh ( 4τ ) + 4 cosh ( 2τ ) + 3 cos ( 4ξ )
2
U ( ξ, τ ) shows a periodic behaviour with period ξ0 =π/2. The correct implementa-
tion of dispersive (GVD) and nonlinear effects (SPM) in the fiber module may be ob-
served by launching a 2nd order soliton into the fiber and by comparing the results
with the theoretical predictions.
b) Simulation: In the diagrams shown in Figure 3, the soliton pulse evolves from
its initial state to a splitted state in the time domain and back again to the initial
shape after one soliton period z0 = ( π ⁄ 2 ) L D .
c) Results: The period length was found to coincide with the predicted theoretical
value.
0.5
100 100 100

z = 0 1 2
z = --- z 0 z = --- z 0
8 8
50 50 50
0 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10
100 100 100
3 4 5
z = --- z0 z = --- z 0 z = --- z0
Power [W]
8 8 8
50 50 50
0 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10
100 100 100
6 7 z = z0
z = --- z0 z = --- z 0
8 8
50 50 50
0 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10 0 2 4 6 8 10
Time [ns]
Figure 3. Time evolution of a 2nd order soliton (N=2).

The fiber length is expressed in terms of the periodic length z0 = ( π ⁄ 2 ) L D .
Parameter Settings: SampleRate 1024e9, NonlinearIndex 2.6e-20, BitRate 1e9,
CoreArea 80.0e-12, Bits 1, MaxStepWidth 1.0e3, RefFrequency 193.1e12,
MaxPhaseChange 0.05, Length (see text), FWHM 1/(16*BitRate), Attenuation 0,
PeakPower (see text above), Dispersion 16.0e-6, DispersionSlope (see text above).
References
[1] G. P. AGRAWAL: Nonlinear fiber optics. Academic Press, 1995, pp. 50–55.
(KDGT0.54CPFQO$KTGHTKPIGPEG2/&
%QCTUG5VGR
%QCTUG5VGR
(KDGT0.5A2/& (KDGTU
Purpose
The module solves a system of two coupled nonlinear Schrödinger equations de-
scribing an evolution of two orthogonal polarization components of optical signals in
fibers with randomly varying birefringence and, hence, allows to model statistical
polarization mode dispersion (PMD).
The four-wave mixing (FWM), self-phase modulation (SPM), cross-phase modula-
tion (XPM), first order group-velocity dispersion (GVD), second order GVD, and at-
tenuation of the fiber are taken into account.
Inputs
input = arbitrary polarized optical field E(z=0,t)
Outputs
output = output field E(z=L,t) after traversing a fiber of Length L
Physical Parameters
a
ReferenceFrequency — Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
reference frequency for the
specified parameters
Length L m real yes ]0,∞]a 1.0e3
fiber length
Attenuation a dB/m real yes [0,10⋅10−2]w 0.2e-3
fiber attenuation
AttFileName — — filename yes — —
file for attenuation vs. fre-
quency
Dispersion Dλ s/m2 real yes [−500⋅10−6,500⋅ 16e-6
dispersion coefficient 10−6]w
DispersionSlope Sλ s/m3 real yes [−103,103]w 0.08e3
slope of the dispersion coeffi-
cient Dλ
NonlinearIndex n2 m2/W real yes [0,20⋅10−20]w 2.6e-20
nonlinear index [−50⋅10−20,
50⋅10−20]a
%QCTUG5VGR
2 −7 w
CoreArea Aeff m real yes ]0,10 ] 80.0e-12
effective core area ]0,∞[a
PolarizModeDisp Dpmd s ⁄ m real yes — 5.0e-12/31.62
polarization mode disper-
sion coefficient
CorrelatLength Lcorr m real yes — 50.0
correlation length of fiber
birefringence
RandomBirefring — — enum yes ON, ON
defines whether birefrin- OFF
gence is random or constant
MaxStepWidth ∆zmax m real yes ]0,∞[w 1.0e3
maximum step width
MaxPhaseChange ∆φnl deg real yes ]0,30]w 0.05
maximum phase change ]0,∞[a
RandomNumberSeed — — int yes [0,10000] 0
lookup index for random scattering; a
unique seed
JoinSignalBands — — enum yes NO, YES
join all sampled signal bands to one sig- YES
nal band
AddNoiseBinsToSignal — — enum yes NO, YES
incorporate noise bins into signal bands YES
if applicable
ControlFlag — — enum yes 0,1,2,3, 4, 5 0
debugging level; defines if output is dis-
played and debug files are produced
Description
The fiber is considered to consist of many short sections with constant birefringence
in each section. The birefringence parameters are uncorrelated for different fiber
sections. The mathematical model for pulse propagation in each section is based on
a set of modified nonlinear Schrödinger equations written for two orthogonal polar-
ization components of the electrical field. These polarization components correspond
to the principle axis of birefringence in the calculated fiber section (see [2]).
%QCTUG5VGR
∂ α ∂ β2 ∂ 2 β3 ∂ 3
+ --- + β 1x – j ------ 2 – ------ 3 Ex ( z, t ) = (1)
∂z 2 ∂t 2 ∂t 6 ∂t
2 2 2
– jγ Ex ( z, t ) + --- ⋅ E y ( z, t ) E x ( z, t )
3
A similar equation with the exchanged x- and y-indices holds for the y-polarization
component. α = 0.1⋅a⋅ln(10) describes the attenuation constant of the fiber (parame-
ter Attenuation). First and second order group velocity dispersion, β2 and β3, are
specified by the parameters Dispersion and DispersionSlope as described in the
FiberNLS module. γ specifies the fiber nonlinearity due to the Kerr effect and is giv-
en by
2 π n 2 f ref
γ = ----------------------- , (2)
cA eff
with the nonlinear index (parameter NonlinearIndex) n2, the effective fiber core
area Aeff (parameter CoreArea), and the reference frequency fref specified by pa-
rameter ReferenceFrequency.
With parameter AttFileName a file that contains a dependence of the attenuation
[dB/m] on the light frequency [Hz] can be specified. The file format is as follows:
193e12 0.2e-3
193.1e12 0.2e-3
193.2e12 0.2e-3
β 1x and β 1y describe the group velocity deviation for the x- and y-polarization com-
ponents. These constants are determined by the statistical parameters Polariz-
ModeDisp (Dpmd) and CorrelatLength (Lcorr) according to [2]:
D pmd
β 1x = – β 1y = ------------------------ . (3)
2 2Lcorr
• Lcorr describes the correlation length of fiber birefringence, i.e., the distance over
which the autocorrelation function of the birefringence drops to 1/e. Typical val-
ues are in the range of 0.3…300 meters [2].
• Dpmd is the PMD-coefficent. It describes the pulse broadening due to the PMD ef-
fect and is given in units of [s/ m ]. (Note: To enter a value in the common units
[ps/ km ], a correction factor of 10−12/ 1000 ≈10−12/31.62 applies.)
Equation (1) is solved numerically by employing a symmetrical split-step Fourier
method. The PMD with randomly varying birefringence is simulated using the
“coarse-step” algorithm that “scatters” the electrical field after each split-step, i.e.,
rotates it randomly on the Poincaré sphere.
Each scattering is done by multiplication of the polarization in the Jones represen-
ˆ
tation with a randomly generated unitary complex 2×2 matrix S ( S ∈ SU ( 2 ) ):
%QCTUG5VGR
 E x ( t )
E( t) =  , E’( t ) = SE ( t ) . (4)
 E y ( t )
Each scattering matrix corresponds to a point on the Poincaré sphere (see also: Vi-
PoincareSphere). Special care has to be taken to ensure uniform probability density
for the distribution of the scattering points on the Poincaré sphere [2]. The uniform
distribution is defined with respect to the solid angle on the Poincare Sphere (see
Figure 1). The scattering points are generated randomly on a unit sphere with the
coordinates s=(s1,s2,s3) where s is the Stokes vector (Figure 1-3). The two indepen-
dent matrix elements of S, e.g., S11 and S12, are determined by the identities
2 2
1 = S 11 + S 12 ,
2 2
s1 = S 11 – S 12 ,
 *  (5)
s2 = 2Re  S 11 ⋅ S 12 ,
 
 * 
s3 = –2 Im  S11 ⋅ S12 ,
 
* *
where the asterisk ∗ denotes complex conjugation and S21 = – S 12 , S 22 = –S 11 .
Figure 1. Poincaré Sphere, covered with uniformly distributed dots, each represent-
ing a scattering operator.
%QCTUG5VGR
550
numerical results
500 theory: D pmd z
450
400
350
300
δt [ps]
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000
z [km]
Figure 2. Dependence of pulse broadening δt due to PMD on the fiber length z.
Comparison of the simulation results (solid line) with a theoretical dependence
δt=Dpmd z (dotted line). A δ-pulse is launched at the fiber input. Parameters
Dλ =Sλ =n2 =0; Dpmd =5ps / km , Lcorr =50m.
Please note that a realistic description of the polarization statistics is only possible
if the number of “scattering” events is large enough. Therefore, the distance be-
tween successive polarization rotations must be much shorter than the fiber length,
but longer than the correlation length: Lcorr ≤ ∆ z « L . Since for the pure dispersive
transmission (n2 =0) the calculations with the split-step method require only one
step (in which case no polarization statistics could be considered), the parameter
MaxStepWidth should be set L corr ≤ ∆ zmax « L , to restrict a distance between po-
larization rotations. It is useful to set this parameter, as above, in other cases as
well.
By setting parameter ControlFlag an additional information on computation re-
sults can be printed to the standard output. If this parameter is set to 5, the pulse
width (more precisely, the value of δt = 〈 τ 2〉 , where 〈 τ 2〉 is the standard deviation
of the pulse shape in the time domain calculated with the instant light power
P(t)=|Ex(z,t)|2 +|Ey(z,t)|2) and the quantity Dpmd z are written for different distanc-
es z to the files /tmp/CoarsePMD.dat.comput and /tmp/CoarsePMD.dat.theo-
ry, respectively (output units: δt is in ps, z is in km).
If the launched pulse (a Dirac, δ-pulse) is very short and its broadening is due to the
polarization mode dispersion only (i.e., the fiber is neither dispersive nor nonlinear:
parameters NonlinearIndex, Dispersion, and DispersionSlope are set to zero),
%QCTUG5VGR
the pulse broadening is given by δt = D pmd z , which is valid in the statistical

sense. This is demonstrated in Figure 2.
• If parameter RandomBirefring is set to OFF, the scattering is inhibited. In this
case, computations with constant birefringence (regarding to the group velocity
difference as in equation (1)) are performed.
• The parameter RandomNumberSeed is used to initialize (‘seed’), the random
number generator used for polarization scattering .
Multiple Bands: The equations hold for each sampled band. Currently, no interac-
tion between different sampled bands are included. Note: If you want to consider
such interactions, please join all sampled bands before the signal is launched into
the fiber. This can also be accomplished by setting parameter JoinSignalBands to
YES.
Parameterized Signals: Attenuation is taken into account for parametrized sig-
nals. Currently, the state of polarization for parametrized signals is unchanged.
Noise Bins: Attenuation of noise bins is taken into account. Currently, the state of
polarization for noise bins is unchanged. If parameter AddNoiseBinsToSignal is
set to YES the noise bins are incorporated into the signal bands (if applicable).
Interactions between differently represented signals: Currently, no interaction be-
tween different sampled bands, parametrized signals, and noise bins is taken into
account.
Multiple Runs: On multiple runs, the random number generator is not reset, i.e.,
the noise sequence for randomly changing birefringence is continued.
Restart of Simulation: The simulation starts again from the beginning, i.e., the
random number generator is reset.
Module Deactivation: If parameter Active is OFF, the signal is simply passed
through.
Comments
A simulation run can be “gently” aborted by sending the UNIX signal USR1, e.g., by
issuing the UNIX command kill -USR1 <PID>, where <PID> is the process id of
pigiRpc.custom. The module will then print the fiber length simulated, so far, to
standard output, and output the current data.
References
[1] G.P. AGRAWAL: Nonlinear Fiber Optics. Academic Press, 1995. pp. 50–54.
[2] D. MARCUSE, C.R. MENYUK, P.K.A. WAI: Application of the Manakov-PMD
Equation to Studies of Signal Propagation in Optical Fibers with Randomly
Varying Birefringence. Journal of Lightwave Technology 15 (1997) 9,
pp. 1735–1745.
%QCTUG5VGR
Acknowledgement
This module was implemented in cooperation with R. Holzlöhner from UMBC, De-
partment of Computer Science and Electrical Engineering, Laboratory of Computa-
tional Physics, Prof. Menyuk.
%QCTUG5VGR
7-
1RVKECN#ORNKHKGTU
Ideal Amplifier with Wavelength Independent Gain 7-3

Erbium-doped Fiber Amplifier (rate- and propagation-equation
according to an improved Giles-model) 7-9
Traveling Wave Semiconductor Optical Amplifier (SOA) 7-25
Erbium-doped Fiber (rate- and propagation-equation according to an
improved Giles-model) 7-30
Dynamic Amplifier EDFA (improved Bononi model) 7-37
+FGCN#ORNKHKGTYKVJ9CXGNGPIVJ+PFGRGPFGPV)CKP
+FGCN#ORNKHKGTYKVJ9CXGNGPIVJ
+PFGRGPFGPV)CKP
#OR5[U1RV 1RVKECN#ORNKHKGTU
Purpose
This module simulates a system-oriented amplifier with a wavelength independent
gain and noise figure behavior. By parameter selection the module may act in a
gain-controlled, output-power-controlled, or saturating (uncontrolled) mode. The
model is not only restricted to high gain amplifiers but is also valid for low gain and
even damping amplifiers.
Inputs
Outputs
(signal type: Optical Blocks, Optical Samples, corresponding to the
input)
Physical Parameters
SystemModelType Selects if the — — enum yes GAIN, GAIN
amplifier is internally GAIN-con- POWER,
trolled, POWER-controlled or runs into SATURATION
SATURATION.
LockedTarget Target (GAIN or G,Pout dB, real yes ]−100,100[ 10.0
POWER) of the amplifier if locked by an dBm
internal control-loop.
UnsaturatedGain Unsaturated Gu dB real yes ]10⋅log(2),∞[ 10.0
gain of the amplifier.
SaturationPower Saturation Psat W real yes ]0,∞[ 10.0e-3
power at 3-dB-optical-gain-compres-
sion.
SaturationMode Selects where — — enum yes INPUT, OUTPUT
the SaturationPower refers to. OUTPUT
IncludeNoise Selects if the ampli- — — enum yes ON, ON
fier really include noise. OFF
NoiseFigure Noise figure of the NF dB real yes [0,∞[ 4.0
amplifier.
NoiseBandwidth Total band- — Hz real yes [0,∞[ 0
width in which noise is considered.
NoiseCenterFrequency Center — Hz real yes [0,∞[ 193.1e12
frequency of the bandwidth in which
ASE noise is considered.
PolarizFilter Employ linear polar- — — enum yes X, NONE
ization filter that passes through the Y,
selected polarization. NONE
NoiseBinSpacing Spacing of ASE — Hz real yes [10⋅106,10⋅1 0.2e12
noise bins. 012]
RandomNumberSeed Lookup — — int no [0,10000] 0
index to use for noise generation. A
unique seed.
Active Defines if the module is — — enum yes ON, ON
active or not. OFF
Description
This system-level amplifier module consists of an ideal amplifying unit character-
ized by a frequency- and wavelength-independent gain G according to
 Ein ,x
Eout =   ⋅ G. (1)
 Ein ,y
It runs in three different modes referring to the amplification behavior. These

modes can be selected by parameter SystemModelType:
• In the “GAIN”-controlled mode the pump power is variable and the parameter
LockedTarget specifies the pure input signal amplification.
Ein G Eout
ASE(G)
Figure 1. System-level amplifier in the “GAIN”-controlled mode.
• In the “POWER”-controlled mode the pump power is variable and the parameter
LockedTarget specifies the total power of the amplified input signal.
G
Ein Eout
ASE(G)
Figure 2. System-level amplifier in the “POWER”-controlled mode.
• In the “SATURATION” mode the module represents an uncontrolled amplifier

with a constant pump power running into internal saturation.
G
G
Gu
Ein Eout 3dB
P
ASE(G)
Psat P
Figure 3. System-level amplifier in the “SATURATION” mode.
For an incremental slice dz of the active medium the amplification process is

assumed to be governed by the propagation equation
dP g
= -------------------------------------- ⋅ P , (2)
dz 1 + P ⁄ P sat,intr
where z is the axis of propagation, g the unsaturated amplification coefficient

and Psat,intr the intrinsic power saturation. Solving this equation results in the
total amplification
 P out Pin ( G – 1 )
ln G = ln  ----------- = g ⋅ L – ---------------------------- , (3)
 P in  P sat,intr
where L is the active medium length and exp(g⋅L)=Gu is the unsaturated am-
plification.
The user-defined SaturationPower Psat specifies the optical power at the
3-dB-optical-gain-compression.
+ If the parameter SaturationMode refers Psat to the input, the intrinsic

saturation power equals
Gu – 2
P sat,intr = P sat ⋅ ----------------- . (4)
2 ⋅ ln 2
In this case the gain G is reduced from the UnsaturatedGain Gu by a
factor of 2 for an input power Pin equal to Psat.
+ If SaturationMode refers Psat to the output,
Gu – 2
P sat,intr = P sat ⋅ ---------------------- (5)
G u ⋅ ln 2
holds and the gain G is reduced from Gu by a factor of 2 for an input pow-
er Pin equal to Psat/(Gu/2).
According to (3), together with (4) or (5), respectively, the resulting gain G is
calculated with a numerical root solving routine.
Please note that the implementation of this amplifier module requires the parame-
ters Gain, NoiseFigure and SaturationPower to be specified in dB and dBm, re-
spectively.
Additionally, the amplifier corrupts the output signal Eout by amplified spontaneous
emission (ASE) noise. The resulting NoiseFigure NF is defined (as in all electronic
systems usual, too) by the quotient of the signal-to-noise-ratio (SNR) at the input di-
vided by the output SNR measured by an ideal, shot-noise limited photodiode [1]:
SNRin
-.
NF = 10 log ------------------- (6)
SNRout
The SNRs are measured in the electrical domain and refer to an ideal photodetector
which converts each incoming photon into one electron.
According to the quantum mechanical treatment in [2] the noise figure is (in a quan-
tum-beat-noise-limited formula) given by
G–1 1 1 + 2N
NF = 10 log 2nsp ⋅ -------------- + ---- = 10 log ------------------ . (7)
G G G
Equation (7) is only valid for (i) a coherent light source, (ii) single-mode propagation
including two polarization modes, and (iii) an input high enough such that
ASE-ASE-beat and ASE-shot noise can be neglected. In a semiclassical description
one would interpret the first term of the sum in (7) as the beat of the signal and the
ASE noise. The second term originates from the normalized signal shot noise. The
symbol N is usually interpreted as the mean photon number of amplified spontane-
ous emission in each polarization mode. The physically minimum noise figure
NFmin can be derived for a really amplifying device if one observes nsp ≥1:
NF > NFmin = 10 log ( 2 – 1 ⁄ G ) . (8)
The minimum value NFmin is possible to be below 3dB, which applies for medium
and low gain amplifiers. For high gain amplifiers ( G » 1 ) the noise figure is limited
by a 3dB minimum value, commonly referred to as the quantum limit. Consequent-
ly, a reduced SNR degradation as compared to the quantum limit is possible, but at
the expense of amplifier gain [1], [2].
For amplifiers showing damping behaviour the minimum noise figure is known [2]
to be
NF > NF min = – 10 log G ,
which again arises from the shot noise process in the photodiode.
Note that in this simulation tool shot-noise processes are generated in the photode-
tector rather than being inherently present in the optical signal. Therefore, in a vir-
tual noise figure measurement, the user must assure to consider the appropriate
signal-to-noise-ratio after passing a shot-noise limited photodiode and not in the op-
tical domain.
From (7) it results for the (one-sided) ASE noise spectral density
dP ASE, x dP ASE, y NF ⁄ 10
10 ⋅ (G – 1)
- = N ⋅ hf = ---------------------------------------------- ⋅ hf ,
----------------------- = ---------------------- (9)
df df 2
where h is Planck’s constant and f denotes the optical frequency.
The amplified spontaneous emission is modeled by a Gaussian distributed noise
added independently to both polarization components, the amplified optical field
components Eout,x and Eout,y. Its degree of polarization is zero.
Please note that the implementation of this amplifier module requires the parame-
ters Gain as well as NoiseFigure to be specified in dB.
The parameter PolarizFilter selects whether a linear polarization filter is inte-
grated at the amplifier’s output that passes through the selected polarization. In-
cluding a polarization filter may accelerate the calculation speed of the succeeding
modules since only one polarization is considered. This procedure can only be ap-
plied if polarization effects do not have to be taken into account for the total simula-
tion scenario.
Furthermore, the parameter RandomNumberSeed is the seed value for the Wich-
man-Hill-Generator. If several noise generating modules are applied in one simula-
tion, the user has to take care of different seed values to avoid correlated noise
sources.
Multiple Bands: Each band is amplified by the same gain value, irrespective to its
wavelength.
Parameterized Signals: Each parameterized signal is amplified by the same gain
value, irrespective to its wavelength.
Noise Bins: Input noise bins are amplified by the same gain value, irrespective to
their wavelength. At the output the amplifier’s own ASE noise is added accoeding to
the settings of parameters NoiseCenterFrequency, NoiseBandwidth and

NoiseBinSpacing.
NoiseBinSpacing
NoiseCenterFrequency NoiseBandwidth
Figure 4. noise bin properties
Interactions between differently represented signals: All kinds of signal types con-
tribute to amplifier saturation (in case of SATURATION systzem model type).
Boundary Conditions: Both, periodic and aperiodic boundary conditions are sup-
ported.
For individual samples only the SystemModelType = GAIN is supported. Each
sample is amplified by Gain.
Restart of Simulation: If the simulation is restarted again, the same seed values
from the lookup table are used for noise generation. Note that topology changes may
Module Deactivation: If Active is OFF, the input signal is passed through to the
output without any changes.
Comments
The noise figure is allowed to fall below NFmin, but an instructive warning is
thrown.
References
[1] D. DERICKSON (Ed.): Fiber Optic Test and Measurement. Prentice Hall, N.J.,
1998.
[2] E. DESURVIRE: Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers. Principles and Applications.
John Wiley & Sons, N.Y., 1994.
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT#ORNKHKGT
TCVGCPFRTQRCICVKQPGSWCVKQPCEEQTFKPIVQCPKORTQXGF)KNGUOQFGN
TCVGCPFRTQRCICVKQPGSWCVKQP
CEEQTFKPIVQCPKORTQXGF)KNGUOQFGN
#OR'&(#A4CVG'S5VCV 1RVKECN#ORNKHKGTU
Purpose
This module simulates an Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) subsystem using
the stationary solution of the rate and propagation equations of a homogeneous,
two-level laser medium. The EDFA subsystem includes already forward and back-
ward pump sources as well as optionally pump reflecting and polarization filters. It
represents an improved version of the Giles-model [2], since it combines the fea-
tures of a radial power distribution calculation (Section IV in [2]) with a full spectral
resolution of the amplified spontaneous emission (ASE; Section V in [2]).
Inputs
Outputs
Physical Parameters
FiberLength L m real yes ]0,500] 6.0
length of the active fiber
CoreRadius rc m real yes [1.0,3.0]⋅10−6 1.5e-6
core radius of the active fiber
NumerAperture na — real yes [0.1,1] 0.29
numerical aperture of the
active fiber
InternalLosses α dB/m real yes [0,0.1] 0.03
fiber background loss coeffi-
cient
DopantDensity Ndop 1/m3 real yes ]0,1027] 2.5e24
dopant density
FluorescenceTime τ s real yes [5⋅10−3,15⋅10−3] 10.0e-3
lifetime of Erbium-ions in the
excited state
CrossSections σ m2 string yes type_i_FL, $BNROOT/
source for the cross-section type_i_exp, data/
spectra type_ii_FL, rebolledo.tcs
type_iii_FL,
type_iii_exp,
type_iv_exp,
user-defined
OverlapIntegral Γ — real yes [0.0,1.0] 0.67
effective overlap integral
between the optical power con-
tributions and the Erbium dop-
ing profile normalized to a full
overlap; for a value of zero, the
power distribution is radially
resolved
FwdPumpPower Pf W real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
forward pump power at begin-
ning of fiber
BkwdPumpPower Pb W real yes [0,∞[ 100.0e-3
backward pump power at end
of fiber
FwdPumpWavelgth λpf m real yes [960,1000]⋅10−9 1480.0e-9
forward pump wavelength or
[1460,1500]⋅10−9
BkwdPumpWavelgth λpb m real yes [960,1000]⋅10−9 980.0e-9
backward pump wavelength or
[1460,1500]⋅10−9
ReflectionInput ri — real yes [0,1[ 0.0
pump power reflection coeffi-
cient at input of fiber
ReflectionOutput ro — real yes [0,1[ 0.0
pump power reflection coeffi-
cient at output of fiber
IncludeNoise — — string yes ON, ON
Selects whether the amplifier Only_Saturati
1. calculates and adds the on,
internal ASE noise to the out- OFF
put (ON),
2. takes ASE into account only
for internal saturation but does
not add it to the output
(Only_Saturation), or
3. does not consider ASE noise
at all (OFF)
NoiseBandwidth — Hz real yes [0,∞[ 18.0e12
total bandwidth in which to
track ASE noise
NoiseCenterFrequency — Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 196.3e12
center frequency of the total
bandwidth in which to track
ASE noise
PolarizFilter — — string yes X, NONE
employ linear polarization fil- Y,
ter that passes through the NONE
selected polarization
IntegrationMethod — — string yes MMM, RK2
specifies the integration method to be RK2,
applied RK4,
RKC4
AxialComputGrid — — real yes [10,10000] 201
number of longitudinal steps
RadialComputGrid — — real yes [4,100] 5
number of radial steps
MaxIterations — — real yes [1,1000] 10
maximum number of numerical itera-
tions
ComputAccur — W real yes [10−9,1] 1.0e-3
mean allowed relative error of the
numerical differential equation solver
NoiseBinSpacing — Hz real yes [10⋅106,20⋅1 0.3e12
spacing of ASE noise bins to generate 012]
within the specified noise bandwidth
OSANoiseBandwidth ∆λOSA m real yes ]0,∞[ 0.1e-9
noise bandwidth in the wavelength
domain of fictitious OSA
NoiseDynamic — dB real yes ]0,∞[ 1.0
maximum allowed ratio of amplified
input noise “coloredness” within one
single noise bin
NoiseThreshold — dB real yes ]−∞,0] -40.0
lowest value relative to the maximum
of the gain shape in which noise bins
are adapted
LogFilenameBase — — file- yes — —
base filename for various result files name
unique seed
Description
Theory: The Rate- and Propagation Equations
Amplification and noise performance of an EDFA depend on both the spectral and
spatial distributions of optical power and the spatial distribution of the Erbium dop-
ing in the fiber. Conventionally, the spatial-dependent spectral intensity I(r,λ)
(units: W/m3) of the light propagating inside the fiber is expressed in the following
form:
I(r, λ) = S(z, λ) ⋅ Ψ ( x, y, λ ) , (1)
T
where the x- and y-components of the locus vector r=(x,y,z) represent the transver-
sal coordinates and the z-component is the propagation axis. In (1), λ denotes the
light wavelength and S(z,λ) the spectral power density (units: W/m). Ψ(x,y,λ) de-
scribes the wavelength-dependent transversal distribution of the radiation field of
the propagating modes (units: m−2). The optical power propagating in the fiber in
one direction can be obtained by integrating the spectral intensity I(r,λ) over the
wavelength and the fiber cross-area.
Optical lightwaves may propagate bidirectional (see below). For this reason, the
spectral density will be provided with a superscript ± so that S+ and S− correspond
to the lightwaves propagating in the positive and negative directions, respectively.
The energy level scheme of Erbium ions can be approximated by the three-level sys-
tem depicted in Figure 1.
NR
A32
R NR R NR
W13 W31 A31 A31 W12 W21 A21 A21
1
= ---
τ
Figure 1. Energy level scheme of Erbium (simplified three-level-scheme).
Wij denotes the probability of the stimulated transition (per unit time, 1/s) between
the energy levels i→j. For example, the absorption of the pump wave is determined
by the probability W13, where the transition 1→3 corresponds to the absorption of a
pump photon. To obtain the total rate of transitions i→j in the unit volume the
probability Wij must be multiplied by the density of Erbium ions Ni (units: m−3) oc-
cupying the ith energy state. The emission and absorption rates of the signal light
are described by the terms W21N2 and W12N1, respectively.
Whereas Wij denotes stimulated transitions, spontaneous emissions from the upper
to the lower level i→j, i>j are described by the probabilities AijR and AijNR, where
the superscripts “R” and “NR” denote radiative and non-radiative transitions, re-
spectively. The dominant decay rates are given by the following relations:
R NR
A 21 » A 21 , (2)
NR R NR
A 32 » A 31, A 31 . (3)
The non-dominant transitions will be neglected in the further consideration. The

time-dependent densities of the Erbium ions occupying the energy levels 1 through
3 are described by the following rate equations [1]:
dN 1 R
----------- = – W 13 N 1 + W 13 N 3 – W 12 N 2 + W 21 N2 + A 21 N 2 , (4)
dt
dN 2 R NR
----------- = W 12 N 1 – W 21 N 2 – A 21 N 2 + A 32 N 3 , (5)
dt
dN3 NR
----------- = W 13 N 1 – W 31 N 3 – A 32 N 3 . (6)
dt
Since in the three-level scheme any Erbium ion can occupy only one of the three lev-
els, a sum of the densities N1(r,t)+N2(r,t)+N3(r,t)=Ndop yields the constant total
density of the Erbium ions Ndop which is time-independent and is predetermined by
the doping process. In agreement with this, the rate equations are linearly depen-
dent: dN1 /dt+dN2 /dt+dN3 /dt=0, which can be trivially shown by a summation
of (6). Note that for simplicity, the spatial dependence of Ni(r) is omitted in (6), but
included into the numerical calculations.
An important feature of an EDFA is the extended fluorescence lifetime τ of excited
Erbium ions in level 2, (A21R)−1 =τ, in the several microseconds range. Therefore, the
densities Ni(r,t) change slowly and the EDFA does not show any significant amplifi-
cation variation during one bit duration. Thus, the saturated gain of the EDFA de-
pends on the average power of the optical signals only. In this respect, the EDFA
can be considered as an essentially linear device. In particular, the channel
crosstalk is effectively suppressed irrespective of the transmission rate. This is a
dramatic difference compared to the behavior of a semiconductor optical amplifier
(SOA).
In the further consideration we neglect the dynamic properties of the EDFA and
solve (6) in a stationary approximation dNi(r,t)/dt=0 for i=1, 2, 3. This condition is
applicable for CW beams, or those modulated at frequencies greater than 10kHz.
A stationary solution of (6) for the densities N1 and N2 is approximately given by
W 12 ( r ) + W 13 ( r )
N2(r) = --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ⋅ N dop ( r ) , (7)
R
W 12 ( r ) + W 13 ( r ) + W 21 ( r ) + A 21
N1(r) = N dop – N 2(r) . (8)
Since the life time of excited Erbium ions in level 3 is extremely short, the rate
A32NR is very large and level 3 remains quasi-vacant. Thus, the occupation density
N3 of level 3 is neglected in (8) against N1 and N2.
The transition probabilities Wij(r) can be expressed in terms of the emission and ab-
sorption cross-sections σij(λ) according to
∞
λ + −
Wij ( r ) = ∫ ----------
h ⋅ c ij
⋅ σ (λ) [ S (z, λ) + S (z, λ) ]Ψ(x, y, λ) dλ , (9)
0
where the spectral power densities S ±(z,λ) include the pump, all the signal compo-
nents and the noise contributions. Absorption and emission cross-sections (σ12(λ)
and σ21(λ), respectively) are functions of the wavelength and determine the EDFA’s
efficiency. Figures 2 and 3 show typical cross-sections σ12(λ) and σ21(λ) according to
the Fuchtbauer-Ladenburg relation in dependence of the wavelength. They corre-
spond to the Erbium-doped alumino-germanosilicate glass fiber.
The transverse intensity distribution Ψ(x,y,λ) is modeled to follow the weakly guid-
ed approximation, i.e., the distribution obeys the fundamental LP01 mode [2].
6.0
σ12/10−25m2
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
λ/µm
0.0
1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65
Figure 2. Absorption cross section σ12(λ) in Er alumino-germanosilicate 3+
glass (type III) according to the Fuchtbauer-Ladenburg relation.
6.0
σ21/10−25m2
5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0
λ/µm
0.0
1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65
Figure 3. Emission cross section σ21(λ) in Er3+ alumino-germanosilicate glass
(type III) according to the Fuchtbauer-Ladenburg relation.
The variation of the spectral power density along the propagation axis of the EDFA
can be described by the propagation equation as follows:
2
d S ± ( z, λ ) = ± m ⋅ hc - ±
------------------ g 21 ( z, λ ) ± [ g 21 ( z, λ ) – g 12 ( z, λ ) – α ] ⋅ S ( z, λ ) . (10)
dz 3
λ
The first term on the right side of (10) describes the noise contribution by the ampli-
fied spontaneous emission (ASE) and the second term describes the stimulated tran-
sitions. The factor m summarizes the ASE contributions in all modes propagating in
the fiber. In the case of a single-mode fiber, this constant is m=2, corresponding to
the two degenerated polarization states. The coefficients gij (z,λ) are calculated from
the overlap integral of the transverse distribution of the density of Erbium ions oc-
cupying the ith energy state and the transverse intensity distribution Ψ(x,y,λ):
gij ( z, λ ) = σ ij ( λ ) ⋅ ∫ ∫ N i ( r ) ⋅ Ψ ( x, y, λ ) dx dy . (11)
The coefficient α in (10) denotes the fiber background loss, which may be caused by,
e.g., scattering from devitrifaction in high-index cores, water penetration or highly
doped fibers for use in distributed amplifiers.
Pump and Internal Reflecting Configurations
Two pump wavelength regions are provided, centered about 1480nm and 980nm
with a full spectral width of 40nm, i.e., in the ranges 960–1000nm and
1460–1500nm. Commercially available EDFAs pumped at 980nm use specially de-
signed Erbium-doped fibers with cut-off wavelengths less than 960nm. Therefore,
the pump field’s transversal distribution Ψ(x,y,λp) is monomodal, not taking into ac-
count two different polarization modes. This monomodal pump field is strictly valid
only for pump wavelengths fulfilling 2π⋅na ⋅rc /λp <2,405, if the field distribution
obeys the fundamental LP01 mode. This corresponds to the condition that higher or-
der modes cannot propagate in the fiber’s core. A warning is issued if the input sig-
nal exhibits spectral components not satisfying the above condition.
At the doped fiber facets, reflections ri and ro (parameters ReflectionInput and
ReflectionOutput) of the forward- and backward-propagating pump powers Pf
and Pb occur, see Figure 5.
+ −
P ( 0 ) = ( 1 – ri )P f + ri P ( 0 )
(12)
− +
P ( L ) = ( 1 – ro )P b + r o P ( L )
It should be noted, that the signal components S+ and S− are not reflected at the fi-
ber ends, as long as their spectral contributions do not fall into the reflecting range
of the assumed fiber Bragg grating. This range has a width of ±20nm around the
characteristic values of 1480 and 980nm. If only one pump source power is unequal
to zero, only one grating is applied, the other one is internally replaced after issuing
a warning. See Figure 4, (a) and (b). If two laser sources pump the EDFA, then it de-
pends upon whether or not they radiate in the same spectral window. In the first
case, both gratings will be eliminated, in the last case, both gratings are applied.
Additionally, the forward (backward) propagating ASE is zero at the fiber’s input
(output).
Reflecting
id. Isolator WSC Grating
(a)
EDF
affects only signal and
rout pump contributions in
Pump
the 40nm range around
laser the nominal forward
1−rout
pump wavelength
(b)
EDF
affects only signal and
pump contributions in rin
Pump
the 40nm range around
the nominal backward laser
1−rout
pump wavelength
(c)
EDF
rin(λp,out) rout (λp,in)

Pump
λpf λ
1−rin lasers pb 1−rout
(d)
EDF
rin=0 rout=0
Pump
λpf λ
lasers pb
Figure 4. Different pump configurations.

(a) Forward Pump Configuration. (b) Backward Pump Configuration.
(c) Bidirectional Pump Configuration (different pump wavelengths).
(d) Bidirectional Pump Configuration (equal pump wavelengths).
Pf 1−ri P+(0) P+(L)
ri ro
Pb
P− (0) −
P (L)
1-ro
z=0 z=L
Figure 5. Facet boundary conditions for the pump powers.
Numerical Solutions
The results of the numerical computations according to the propagation
equation (10) yield the signal power and the ASE noise at the output of the amplifi-
er. For the ASE noise, the entire user-defined NoiseBandwidth is taken into con-
sideration. If the EDFA is pumped at a wavelength around 980nm, a separate
differential equation is added.
To fulfill the boundary conditions is a non-trivial problem for numerical treatment,
since bidirectional propagation must always be considered. Even in the case of
co-propagating of the signal and pump power this problem occurs, since S− is cor-
rupted by ASE. For example, in the case of positive pump power propagation, e.g.,
both S+ and S− must be known at z=0 for the first integration step in positive z-di-
rection. However, the initial value of S− is specified at the output fiber end z=L
(where L is the fiber length) and therefore is unknown at z=0.
The numerical treatment of the propagation equation (10) needs a discretization in
the wavelength range where the EDFA is considered to be an active device. To hold
the computational load in acceptable limits, the amplification is calculated only at
special wavelengths: the center location of each sampled or parametrized channel
and the center location of each input noise bin. The internal ASE noise is calculated
only at the user-defined frequency grid specified by the parameters NoiseBand-
width, NoiseCenterFrequency, and NoiseBinSpacing.
For solution of the two-point boundary problem an iterative procedure is applied,
called relaxation method [1]. The first integration step is performed with the un-
known boundary values being set to zero. After the first integration step, estimate
values exist which initialize the next integration step, etc. At the opposite fiber end,
the reflection coefficient is considered and the calculation routine starts in the oppo-
site direction. This procedure is repeated several times until the results converge to
the steady state within the desired accuracy.
PTDS provides four integration methods: the ‘Modified-Midpoint-Method’, abbrevi-
ated by MMM, the standard ‘Runge-Kutta-Methods’ of second order (RK2) and of
fourth order (RK4), and the ‘Runge-Kutta-Chai-Method´ of fourth order (RKC4). Dif-
ferent methods are selected by parameter IntegrationMethod. Roughly spoken,
the calculation times rise by a factor of 2 from MMM via RK2 to RK4, RKC4. On the oth-
er hand, concerning the stability behavior, RKC4 and RK4 are most robust, followed
by RK2 and MMM. It should be noted that in most cases all methods work correctly.
A priori, it is not possible to know which numerical routine is optimum for a given
problem. It is recommended to test different procedures and compare their results.
The output file «LogFilenameBase».msg helps to get an opinion on the convergen-
cy behavior of the chosen routine.
For the output of the module, the amplification is cubically interpreted at each in-
put frequency.
Description of output files
Several output files are stored during calculation if the string parameter LogFile-
nameBase is specified. They give the user additional information about the chosen
EDFA configuration and the numerical convergency.
The following files are available:
• «LogFilenameBase».ampf contains the forward gain profile in dependence of
the wavelength. The gain values are determined at wavelengths, where an in-
put signal component is detected. The data are stored in two columns (wave-
length in m, gain in dB).
They may serve to feed directly the AmpBlackBoxOpt module with gain data.
• «LogFilenameBase».asef contains the total forward ASE noise profile in de-
pendence of the wavelength. The data are stored in two columns (wavelength
in m, noise in dBm). The ASE noise equals the ASE spectral density SASE(λ)
(units: W/Hz) summed over both polarization components and multiplied with a
user-defined noise bandwidth (parameter OSANoiseBandwidth) given by
∆fOSA =∆λOSA⋅c/λ2 (unit: Hz). The subscript OSA may give a hint that in a real
noise profile measurement an optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) is applied.
The data may serve to directly feed the AmpBlackBoxOpt with noise data.
Note: Including a polarization filter does not affect the ASE noise file, since
the optional polarization filter is located behind the inner EDFA subsystem.
• «LogFilenameBase».den contains the relative density of both excited and
ground-state Erbium ions in dependence of the fiber length. The relative densi-
ty is averaged over the core area A according to
dA
Ni =
°∫A N ( r ) -------
A
-. (13)
The data are stored in three columns (fiber locus in m, N 2 ⁄ Ndop , N 1 ⁄ N dop ).
• «LogFilenameBase».gamma contains the spectrum of the normalized overlap
integral and is written only in the case if the specified value of the overlap inte-
gral Γ is zero.
• «LogFilenameBase».msg is a message file containing the mean relative pow-
er error at the input and output facette after each iteration step. This helps the
user to get an impression about the convergency behavior of the chosen numer-
ical routine.
• «LogFilenameBase».nff contains the forward noise figure calculated at
wavelengths, where an input signal component is detected according to the for-
mula
dPASE ⁄ df
NF = 10 ⋅ log10  ---------------------------- + ------------- .
1
 hf ⋅ G ( λ ) G ( λ )
Here h and dPASE/df denote the Planck constant and the total ASE noise spec-
tral density, respectively. The data are stored in two columns (wavelength in m,
noise figure in dB).
• «LogFilenameBase».apb and
«LogFilenameBase».apf contain the total ASE power propagating forward
(.apf) and backward (.apb) in dependence of the fiber length. The data are
stored in two columns (wavelength in m, power in W).
• «LogFilenameBase».ppb and
«LogFilenameBase».ppf contain the pump power propagating forward
(.ppf) and backward (.ppb) in dependence of the fiber length. All signal contri-
butions falling inside a spectral window around the nominal pump wavelength
of 1480nm with a width of ±20nm are treated to be pump components, too. The
data are stored in two columns (fiber locus in m, sum of the powers at the for-
ward and backward pump wavelengths, specified by FwdPumpWavelgth and
BkwdPumpWavelgth, respectively, in W). The file is stored only if the power
data differ from zero.
• «LogFilenameBase».spb and
«LogFilenameBase».spf contain the signal power in each detected signal
component propagating forward (.spf) and backward (.spb) in dependence of
the fiber length. The data are stored in multicolumn format with one column
for each signal bearing channel (first column: fiber locus in m, next columns:
signal power in W). The columns are ordered with increasing wavelength.
• «LogFilenameBase».tcs contains the transition cross-sections σ21 and σ12 in
dependence of the wavelength. The file contains three columns (wavelength
in m, σ21 in m2, σ12 in m2) with either the calculated cross-sections approximat-
ed by the Gaussian or Lorentzian line shapes according to [1] or the cu-
bic-spline-interpolated values originating from the user-defined file
CrossSections.
Description of parameters
• FiberLength specifies the length of the Erbium doped fiber.
• CoreRadius specifies the core radius of the Erbium doped fiber.
• NumerAperture chooses the numerical aperture of the Erbium doped fiber.
• InternalLosses makes it possible to specify the fiber background loss.
• DopantDensity specifies the doping concentration of the Erbium ions inside

the fiber’s core. The ion doping is assumed to exhibit an uniform profile inside
the fiber’s core so that the ions are well confined to the center of the optical
modes.
• FluorescenceTime specifies the lifetime of Erbium ions in the excited state.
• CrossSections determines the source for the cross-sections spectra with the
possible pre-defined fiber types type_i_FL, type_i_exp, type_ii_FL, type_iii_FL,
type_iii_exp, and type_iv_exp given in [1] on pp. 250–252 and p. 299. The exten-
sion “FL” denotes the Fuchtbauer-Ladenburg relation whereas the extension
“exp” denotes experimental peak values. Type I corresponds to an Er3+ ger-
manosilicate glass fiber, Types II and III both stand for alumino-germanosili-
cate glass fiber; the concentration of alumina is higher for Type III than for
Type II. Numerically, these cross-sections are approximated by the sum of
Gaussian line shapes with fitting parameters given in [1]. According to [1],
p. 263, the peak value σ12peak /(10−25 m2) of Type I (Type II; III) is 6.1 (5.8; 5.3),
whereas the peak value σ21peak /(10−25 m2) is 8.7 (6.5; 5.8), respectively. Type IV
is the same as Type III with the exception that a Lorentzian fitting of an ab-
sorption and emission cross sections is performed according to [1] with peak
values of σ21peak /(10−25 m2)=4.4 and σ12peak /(10−25 m2)=4.7.
Alternatively, the parameter CrossSections can be a user-defined string spec-
ifying an ASCII file that contains measured or user-defined cross-section data
σ21(λ) and σ12(λ). The format must be columnwise oriented with the first col-
umn containing the wavelength (in m), the second and third σ21 and σ12
(in m2), respectively. The values within a row are separated by spaces resulting
in a format according to:
λ[1] σ21[1] σ12[1]
λ[2] σ21[2] σ12[2]
λ[3] σ21[3] σ12[3]
…
λ[N] σ21[N] σ12[N]
The default value of the parameter CrossSections is $BNROOT/data/
rebolledo.tcs, which contains data of Prof. Rebolledo [3].
• OverlapIntegral specifies the effective value Γ of the overlap integral between
the optical power distributions and the Erbium doping profile normalized to a
full overlap according to equation (11):
˜
Γ
Γ = ------ =
Γ˜
∫∫ N 2(x, y)Ψ(x, y, λ) dx dy ⁄ Γ˜0 .
0
Here Γ˜0 is the non-normalized value of the overlap integral for the perfect
matching of the doping and the power distribution with N2(x, y) ∼ Ψ(x, y, λ) .
For the present state of this module, the overlap integral is assumed to be
wavelength independent.
• FwdPumpPower defines the forward pump power at the beginning of the fi-
ber.
• BkwdPumpPower specifies the backward pump power at the end of the fiber.
• FwdPumpWavelgth selects the wavelength of the pumping wave travelling
forward inside the Erbium-doped fiber.
• BkwdPumpWavelgth selects the wavelength of the pumping wave travelling
backward inside the Erbium-doped fiber.
• ReflectionInput is the pump power reflection coefficient at the input facet of
the fiber. See Figure 5.
• ReflectionOutput is the pump power reflection coefficient at the output facet
of the fiber. See Figure 5.
• IncludeNoise Selects whether the amplifier
1. calculates and adds the internal ASE noise to the output (ON),
2. takes ASE into account only for internal saturation but does not add it to
the output (Only_Saturation), or
3. does not consider ASE noise at all (OFF).
• OSANoiseBandwidth selects the noise bandwidth (in the wavelength do-
main) within the ASE noise is measured. The ASE noise equals the ASE spec-
tral density SASE(λ) (units: W/Hz) multiplied with ∆fOSA=∆λOSA⋅c/λ2 (unit: Hz).
The subscript OSA may give a hint that in a real noise profile measurement, an
optical spectrum analyzer (OSA) is applied.
• The parameter PolarizFilter selects whether a linear polarization filter is in-
tegrated at the amplifier’s output that passes through the selected polarization.
Including a polarization filter may accelerate the calculation speed of the suc-
ceeding modules since only one polarization is considered. This procedure can
only be applied if polarization effects do not have to be taken into account for
the total simulation scenario.
• IntegrationMethod chooses the integration method, with the possible values
MMM (‘Modified-Midpoint-Method’), RK2, RK4 (‘Runge-Kutta-Methods’ of second
and fourth order) and RKC4 (‘Runge-Kutta-Chai-Method’ of fourth order).
• AxialComputGrid, RadialComputGrid specify the number of computation-
al steps being done along the z-axis and the radial direction, respectively. They
influence the numerical accuracy. It is not allowed to choose RadialComput-
Grid smaller than 4 to assure a sufficient numerical accuracy for the gain coef-
ficients gij (λ,z) of eq. (11).
• ComputAccur, MaxIterations specify termination criteria. The mean al-
lowed relative power error of the numerical differential equation solver of (10)
at both fiber facets is denoted by ComputAccur. The mean value is calculated
over all signal and pump conditions.
The maximum number of iteration loops of the chosen integration routine are
stored in MaxIterations. This additional termination criterion is intended to
avoid unacceptable long calculation times (e.g., in the case of numerical insta-
bilities or poor numerical convergence). However, if the calculation is terminat-
ed because the specified maximum number of iterations has been reached, the
results may have not the desirable accuracy.
• The module’s behavior with respect to the noise signal carried is modified using
the parameters NoiseDynamic and NoiseThreshold, respectively. Noise
bins are resized in bandwidth if two conditions are satisfied: (1) The dynamic
range of the filters’s transfer function (i.e., the logarithmic ratio of its maxi-
mum to minimum value) exceeds parameter NoiseDynamic. (2) The attenua-
tion in the spectral region of the bin does not exceed the value specified by
parameter NoiseThreshold.
• LogFilenameBase is the base filename for the output files with different ex-
tensions generated in the home directory (or user-defined path) during execu-
tion of the module.
• RandomNumberSeed is the seed value for the Wichman-Hill-Generator. If
several noise generating modules are applied in one simulation, the user has to
take care of different seed values to avoid correlated noise sources.
Multiple Bands: Input power and associated center wavelength of each channel is
detected. After the calculation, the band is multiplied by a cubic interpolated gain
profile.
Parameterized Signals: Input power and wavelength of the parametrized signal is
detected. After the calculation, this signal is multiplied by its gain.
Noise Bins: If it is possible and globally allowed, noise bins are incorporated into
the multiple bands. The powers and center wavelengths of the remaining noise bins
are detected as they affect the EDFA’s saturation and gain. The additional EDFA’s
ASE noise sources the locally generated noise bins, which is added to the output
port, too.
Interactions between differently represented signals: All input powers together af-
fect the EDFA’s saturation and, consequently, the gain and noise figure.
For more information on available reset modes together with sweep capabilities, see
SimulationManager.
References
[2] C.R. GILES, E. DESURVIRE: Modeling Erbium-doped fiber amplifiers. Journal of
Lightwave Technology, Vol. 9, No. 2, Feb. 1991, pp. 271–283.
[3] M.A. REBOLLEDO: Proposal for COST 241, Working Group 3: Active fibres and
amplifiers. COST 241 Workshop, Dresden, 1992.
6TCXGNKPI9CXG5GOKEQPFWEVQT1RVKECN#ORNKHKGT
51#
6TCXGNKPI9CXG5GOKEQPFWEVQT
1RVKECN#ORNKHKGT
51#
#OR51# 1RVKECN#ORNKHKGTU
Purpose
The module simulates a traveling wave semiconductor optical amplifier (SOA), us-
ing semi-analytical longitudinal integration.
Inputs
(signal type: Optical Blocks).
Outputs
output = amplified optical signal
Physical Parameters
InjectionCurrent I A real yes [0,1] 0.15
injection current of SOA
Length L m real yes ]0,10−3] 500.0e-6
length of the amplifier
Width w m real yes ]0,50⋅10−6] 3.0e-6
width of the active layer
Height d m real yes ]0,5⋅10−6] 80.0e-9
height of the active layer
OptConfinement Γ — real yes ]0,1] 0.15
InternalLosses αs 1/m real yes [0,5⋅104] 40.0e2
waveguide losses
DifferentialGain dg/dN m2 real yes ]0,50⋅10−20] 2.78e-20
differential modal gain
CarrierDensityTransp Ntr m−3 real yes ]0,5⋅1025] 1.4e24
carrier density at the transparency
point
IndexToGainCoupl α — real yes [−20,20] 5.0
RecombConstA A 1/s real yes [0,1011] 1.43e8
recombination coefficient A
RecombConstB B m3/s real yes ]0,10−13] 1.0e-16
recombination coefficient B
51#
6 −37
RecombConstC C m /s real yes ]0,10 ] 3.0e-41
recombination coefficient C
InitCarrierDens — m−3 real no ]0,5⋅1025] 3.0e24
maximum number of iterations when
solving the differential equation
relative accuracy of the solution of the
differential equation
InitialStepWidth — s real yes [10−15,10−9] 1.0e-12
trial time step size for the numerical
solution of the differential equation
minimum allowed time step when solv-
ing the differential equation
defines whether the module is active or OFF
not
Description
This module implements a simple lump model of the traveling-wave semiconductor
optical amplifier (SOA) [1]. The physical quantities are averaged over the Length L
of the device [4]. Note, that a time dependence of the gain caused by saturation ef-
fects as well as the time-dependent phase change due to the gain-index coupling are
included into this model.
The gain medium of the amplifier is described by the material gain coefficient g(N)
(per unit length) which is dependent on the carrier density N and is given by
dg
g ( N ) = -------- ( N – N tr ) , (1)
dN
where Ntr is the carrier density at transparency point (parameter CarrierDensi-
tyTransp) and dg/dN is the differential gain (parameter DifferentialGain) char-
acterizing a slope of the dependence g(N). The actual amplification of optical waves
in the amplifier is determined also by the optical confinement factor Γ defined as a
fraction of the mode power within the active layer (parameter OptConfinement)
and by the waveguide (scattering) loss αs (parameter InternalLosses)
51#
g tot ( N ) = Γ g ( N ) – α s , (2)
where gtot(N) is the net gain coefficient. The total gain G(z) of optical wave at the lo-
cation z of SOA can be calculated according to
G ( N, z ) = exp [ gtot ( N ) z ] = exp [ ( Γ g ( N ) – αs ) z ] , (3)
where a constant carrier density N(z)=const over the amplifier length was assumed.
With (3) the average light power Pav over the length of amplifier can be found as fol-
lows:
L L L
1 1 Pin
P av = ---- ∫ P ( N, z ) dz = ---- ∫ P in G ( N, z ) dz = --------- ∫ exp [ gtot ( N )z ] dz
L L L
0 0 0 (4)
exp [ g tot ( N )L ] – 1
= P in ------------------------------------------------- .
g tot ( N )L
Note, that Pav is a function of time because the input signal power Pin(t) and the
carrier density N(t) are time-dependent in (4). The dynamic equation for the carrier
density N(t) is given by [4]
dN I Γg ( N ) P av ( N, t ) L
-------- = ------- – R ( N ) – ---------------------------------------------- , (5)
dt qV Vhf
where I is the injection current (parameter InjectionCurrent), q is the electron
charge, V=L×w×d is the volume, w is the width (parameter Width), and d is the
thickness (parameter Height) of the active layer. The last term of (5) describes a de-
pletion of inversion due to the stimulated emission. f denotes the light frequency
and h the Planck constant. The recombination rate R(N) includes the spontaneous
emission and the non-radiative transitions, in particular the Auger
recombination [5]
2 3
R ( N ) = AN + BN + CN , (6)
where A, B, and C are constants characterizing the different recombination process-
es. They are specified by parameters RecombConstA, RecombConstB and Re-
combConstC, respectively.
Equations (5)–(6) are solved numerically using a 5th order Runge-Kutta algorithm
with an adaptive control of the step size. Parameter InitCarrierDens determines
the start value for N. MaxStepsNumber, RelativeAccuracy, InitialStepWidth,
and MinimumStepWidth are parameters employed by the integration algorithm.
RelativeAccuracy specifies the accuracy of the computations. MaxStepsNumber
is the maximum number of iterations. InitialStepWidth denotes the first trial
time step size and MinimumStepWidth is the minimum allowed step size.
After the dependence N(t) was numerically found, the output optical field Eout(t) is
calculated from the input field Ein(t) according to
51#
( 1 + j α )Γ g ( N ( t ) ) L – α s L
Eout ( t ) = Ein ( t ) exp ------------------------------------------------------------------ , (7)
2
where the linewidth enhancement factor α [5], specified by parameter IndexTo-
GainCoupl, takes into account the coupling between the gain and refractive index
of the amplifying medium. In particular, this coupling leads to the chirp of output
signal if SOA is “dynamically” saturated, i.e., N(t) shows a significant variation dur-
ing the bit length. This is the effect being similar to the laser chirp in modules Laser
Rate Equations (Single Mode) or Laser Pulsed.
Multiple Bands: Equation (5) is written in the form which is valid for one sampled
frequency band. To include the carrier density dynamics due to the stimulated emis-
sion into multiple frequency bands the factor Pav(N,t)/f in (5) is replaced by the sum
(k)
Pav ( N, t ) P av ( N, t )
------------------------ → ∑ -------------------------- , (8)
f fk
k
(k)
where Pav (t) denotes the average power and fk the center frequency of the kth fre-
quency band. Pav(k)(t) is calculated using (4), where the input power Pin(t) is re-
placed by Pin(k)(t) and calculated from the input optical field Ein(k)(t) according to
Pin(k)(t)=|Ein(k)(t)|2.
Parameterized Signals: The contribution of the parameterized signals to the SOA
saturation is calculated by extending the sum (8) with terms corresponding to the
parameterized signals. The averaged power Pav(n) of the nth parameterized signal is
calculated using (4), where the input power Pin(n) is taken from the input parame-
terized signal. Both Pav(n) and Pin(n) are constant with respect to time. Therefore the
time dependence of N(t) is averaged when using (4). The output power is calculated
according to:
(n) (n)
Pout = Pin 〈 exp [ Γg ( N ( t ) )L – α s L ]〉 , (9)
where the angle brackets mean the time averaging.

Noise Bins: The noise bins are taken into account in the same way as the parame-
terized signals.
Interactions between differently represented signals: Since the SOA is a nonlinear
device there are interactions between different signal parts. For example, the pa-
rameterized signals can saturate the SOA, which results in the decrease of gain for
the sampled signals.
Boundary Conditions: Note, that unlike the most of other models this module im-
plies aperiodic boundary conditions. The signal is assumed to be continously extend-
ed beyond the simulation time window, when performing multiple runs.
51#
Comments
• SOA’s are highly nonlinear devices, which can be used not only for signal am-
plification but also for other kinds of all-optical signal processing, like frequen-
cy conversion, switching, optical time domain demultiplexing etc.
• Usually the operation of the SOA’s depends on the polarization state of light.
Special effort is required to make them polarization-independent, which is an
important issue for the field applications. Our model assumes a polarization-in-
dependent SOA, so that the signals with arbitrary polarization state can be
handled by this module.
• This model neglects the gain dispersion (dependence of the gain on the wave-
length of the optical wave) and the amplified spontaneous emission (ASE)
noise. Neglecting the gain dispersion is valid as long as the bandwidth of the
optical signal is significantly smaller than the amplification bandwidth (typi-
cally of the order of several tenth of nm’s). The bandwidth limitations of SOA
can be modeled using additional optical filters. The noise can be added to the
amplified signal using module Noise White Gaussian (Optical).
References:
[1] S. SHIMADA, H. ISHIO: Optical Amplifiers and their Applications. John Wiley,
Chichester, 1994. Ch. 3–4.
[2] E. JAHN: Monolithically Integrated Semiconductor Laser Amplifier Based Inter-
ferometers for Optical Signal Processing. PhD Thesis, Berlin, 1996.
[3] M.J. O’MAHONY: Semiconductor Laser Optical Amplifiers for Use in Future Fi-
ber Systems. Journal of Lightwave Technology, Vol. 6, No. 4, April 1988.
pp. 531–544.
[4] M.J. ADAMS, H.J. WESTLAKE, M.J. O’MAHONY & I.D. HENNING: A Comparison
of Active and Passive Optical Bistability in Semiconductors. IEEE Journal of
quantum electronics, Vol. QE-21, No. 9, September 1985. pp. 1498–1501.
[5] G.P. AGRAWAL, N.K. DUTTA: Long-Wavelength Semiconductor Lasers. Van Nos-
trand Reinhold, New York, 1986.
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
TCVGCPFRTQRCICVKQPGSWCVKQP
CEEQTFKPIVQCPKORTQXGF)KNGUOQFGN
'&(A4CVG'S5VCV 1RVKECN#ORNKHKGTU
Purpose
This module simulates a stand-alone Erbium-doped fiber (EDF) using the station-
ary solution of the rate and propagation equations of a homogeneous, two-level laser
medium. It represents an improved version of the Giles-model [2], since it combines
the features of a radial power distribution calculation (Section IV in [2]) with a full
spectral resolution of the amplified spontaneous emission (ASE; Section V in [2]).
Inputs
forwardIn = Forward input of optical signal (left).
backwardIn = Backward input of optical signal (right).
Outputs
forwardOut = Forward output of optical signal (right).
backwardOut = Backward output of optical signal (left).
Physical Parameters
length of the Erbium doped
fiber
CoreRadius rc m real yes [10−6,3⋅10−6] 1.5e-6
core radius of the Erbium
doped fiber
numerical aperture of the
Erbium doped fiber
InternalLosses α dB/m real yes [0,0.1] 0.03
fiber background loss coeffi-
cient
density of Erbium ions
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
FluorescenceTime τ s real yes [5⋅10−3 −3
,15⋅10 ] 10.0e-3
lifetime of Erbium ions in the
excited state
CrossSections — m2 filename yes type_i_FL, $BNROOT/
source for the transient type_i_exp, data/
cross-section spectra type_ii_FL, rebolledo.
type_iii_FL, tcs
type_iii_exp,
type_iv_exp,
user-defined
OverlapIntegral Γ — string yes [0.0,1.0] 0.67
effective overlap integral
between the optical power con-
tributions and the Erbium dop-
ing profile normalized to a full
overlap; for a value of zero, the
power distribution is radially
resolved
IncludeNoise — — — yes ON, ON
Selects whether the amplifier Only_Saturat
1. calculates and adds the ion,
internal ASE noise to the out- OFF
put (ON),
2. takes ASE into account only
for internal saturation but does
not add it to the output
3. does not consider ASE noise
at all (OFF)
total bandwidth in which to
track ASE noise
center frequency of the total
ASE noise
IntegrationMethod — — enum yes MMM, RK2
integration method for solving rate RK2,
equations RK4,
RKC4
AxialComputGrid — — int yes [10,10000] 201
number of axial computational steps
RadialComputGrid — — int yes [4,100] 5
number of radial computational steps
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
MaxIterations — — int yes [1,1000] 10
maximum number of numerical itera-
tions
ComputAccur — — real yes [10−9,1] 1.0e-3
mean allowed relative error of the
numerical differential-equation-solver
NoiseBinSpacing — Hz real yes [10⋅106,10⋅1 0.3e12
spacing of ASE noise bins to generate 012]
within the specified noise bandwidth
OSANoiseBandwidth — m real yes ]0,∞[ 0.1e-9
noise bandwidth in the wavelength
domain of fictitious OSA
maximum allowed ratio of amplified
input noise “coloredness” within one
single noise bin
NoiseThreshold — dB real yes [0,∞[ -40.0
lowest value relative to the maximum
of the gain shape in which to adapt the
“coloredness” within one single noise
bins
LogFilenameBase — — file- yes — —
base filename for various result files name
lookup index to use for noise genera-
tion; a value of zero implies an auto-
matic, unique seed
Active — — enum yes ON, OFF ON
defines if the module is active or not
Description
Preliminary Remarks
This stand-alone Erbium-doped fiber (EDF) shares simulation routines with the Er-
bium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) subsystem (module AmpEDFA_RateEqStat).
Consequently, largely the same description applies to both modules. Whenever pos-
sible, a reference to the module AmpEDFA_RateEqStat is made. Only these parts
are described in detail here which differ from the description of the EDFA sub-
system module.
There are three main modifications of the EDFA subsystem to obtain the
stand-alone EDF module:
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
• There are no forward and backward pump sources. For pumping the EDF, appro-
priate power contributions must be included into the input signals.
• The EDF module supports bidirectional signal propagation.
• There are no reflecting wavelength-selective input and/or output filters.
• There are no polarization filters.
Theory: The Rate- and Propagation Equations
See module AmpEDFA_RateEqStat.
Numerical Solutions
The results of the numerical computations according to the propagation equation
[(10) in the AmpEDFA_RateEqStat module] yield the signal power and the ASE
noise at both outputs of the fiber. For the ASE noise, the entire user-defined Noise-
Bandwidth is taken into consideration. If the EDF is pumped at a wavelength
around 980nm, a separate differential equation is added.
To fulfill the boundary conditions is a non-trivial problem for numerical treatment,
since bidirectional propagation must always be considered. Even in the case of
co-propagating of the signal and pump power this problem occurs, since S− is cor-
rupted by ASE. For example, in the case of positive pump power propagation, e.g.,
both S+ and S− must be known at z=0 for the first integration step in positive z-di-
rection. However, the initial value of S− is specified at the output fiber end z=L
(where L is the fiber length) and therefore is unknown at z=0.
The numerical treatment of the propagation equation [(10) in the
AmpEDFA_RateEqStat module] needs a discretization in the wavelength range
where the EDFA is considered to be an active device. To hold the computational load
in acceptable limits, the amplification is calculated only at special wavelengths: the
center location of each sampled or parametrized channel and the center location of
each input noise bin. The internal ASE noise is calculated only at the user-defined
frequency grid specified by the parameters NoiseBandwidth, NoiseCenterFre-
quency, and NoiseBinSpacing.
For solution of the two-point boundary problem an iterative procedure is applied,
called relaxation method [1]. The first integration step is performed with the un-
known boundary values being set to zero. After the first integration step, estimate
values exist which initialize the next integration step, etc. At the opposite fiber end,
the opposite propagating signal is considered and the calculation routine starts in
the opposite direction. This procedure is repeated several times until the results
converge to the steady state within the desired accuracy.
PTDS provides four integration methods: the ‘Modified-Midpoint-Method’, abbrevi-
ated by MMM, the standard ‘Runge-Kutta-Methods’ of second order (RK2) and of
fourth order (RK4), and the ‘Runge-Kutta-Chai-Method´ of fourth order (RKC4). Dif-
ferent methods are selected by parameter IntegrationMethod. Roughly spoken,
the calculation times rise by a factor of 2 from MMM via RK2 to RK4, RKC4. On the oth-
er hand, concerning the stability behavior, RKC4 and RK4 are most robust, followed
by RK2 and MMM. It should be noted that in most cases all methods work correctly.
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
A priori, it is not possible to know which numerical routine is optimum for a given
problem. BNeD recommends to test different procedures and compare their results.
The output file «LogFilenameBase».msg helps to get an opinion on the convergen-
cy behavior of the chosen routine.
For the output of the module, the amplification is cubically interpreted at each in-
put frequency.
nameBase is specified. They give the user additional information about the chosen
EDF configuration and the numerical convergency.
In alphabetical order, there are available:
• «LogFilenameBase».ampf and
«LogFilenameBase».ampb contain the forward (.ampf) and backward (.ampb)
gain profile in dependence of the wavelength. The gain values are determined
at wavelengths, where an input signal component is detected. The data are
stored in two columns (wavelength in m, gain in dB).
They may serve to feed directly the AmpBlackBoxOpt module with gain data.
• «LogFilenameBase».asef and
«LogFilenameBase».aseb contain the total forward (.asef) and backward
(.aseb) ASE noise profile in dependence of the wavelength. The data are stored
in two columns (wavelength in m, noise in dBm). The ASE noise equals the
ASE spectral density SASE(λ) (units: W/Hz) summed over both polarization
components and multiplied with a user-defined noise bandwidth (parameter
OSANoiseBandwidth) given by ∆fOSA =∆λOSA⋅c/λ2 (unit: Hz). The subscript
OSA may give a hint that in a real noise profile measurement an optical spec-
trum analyzer (OSA) is applied.
The data may serve to directly feed the AmpBlackBoxOpt with noise data.
• «LogFilenameBase».gamma , see AmpEDFA_RateEqStat.
• «LogFilenameBase».msg , see AmpEDFA_RateEqStat.
• «LogFilenameBase».nff and
«LogFilenameBase».nfb contains the forward (.nff) and backward (.nfb)
noise figure calculated at wavelengths, where an input signal component is de-
tected according to the formula
dPASE ⁄ df
NF = 10 ⋅ log10  ---------------------------- + ------------- .
1
 hf ⋅ G ( λ ) G ( λ )
Here h and dPASE/df denote the Planck constant and the total ASE noise spec-
tral density, respectively. The data are stored in two columns (wavelength in m,
noise figure in dB).
For the remaining files:
• «LogFilenameBase».apb
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
• «LogFilenameBase».apf
• «LogFilenameBase».ppb
• «LogFilenameBase».ppf
• «LogFilenameBase».spb
• «LogFilenameBase».spf
• «LogFilenameBase».tcs , see AmpEDFA_RateEqStat.
See description of the AmpEDFA_RateEqStat module.
Multiple Bands: Input power and associated center wavelength of each channel is
detected. After the calculation, the band is multiplied by a cubic interpolated gain
profile.
Parameterized Signals: Input power and wavelength of the parametrized signal is
detected. After the calculation, this signal is multiplied by its gain.
Noise Bins: If it is possible and globally allowed, noise bins are incorporated into
the multiple bands. The powers and center wavelengths of the remaining noise bins
are detected as they affect the EDF’s saturation and gain. The additional EDF’s
ASE noise sources the locally generated noise bins, which is added to the output
port, too.
For more information on available reset modes together with sweep capabilities, see
SimulationManager.
References
[2] C.R. GILES, E. DESURVIRE: Modeling Erbium-doped fiber amplifiers. Journal of
Lightwave Technology, Vol. 9, No. 2, Feb. 1991, pp. 271–283.
'TDKWOFQRGF(KDGT
&[PCOKE#ORNKHKGT'&(#
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
#OR'&(#A&[PCOKE 1RVKECN#ORNKHKGTU
Purpose
This module simulates a dynamic model of an Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
subsystem and is based on the publication of A. Bononi and L.A. Rusch [1]. It is an
improved version, since it includes amplified spontaneous emission (ASE).
Inputs
forwardIn = Forward input of optical signal (left).
backwardIn = Backward input of optical signal (right).
Outputs
forwardOut = Forward output of optical signal (right).
backwardOut = Backward output of optical signal (left).
Physical Parameters
length of the active fiber
CoreRadius rc m real yes [10−6,3⋅10−6] 1.5e-6
core radius of the active fiber
numerical aperture of the active
fiber
dopant density
FluorescenceTime τ s real yes [5⋅10−3,15⋅10−3] 10.0e-3
lifetime of Erbium ions in the
excited state
InitialInversion ρ 0′ — real no [0,1] 0.5
relative number of excited
Erbium ions at initialization
instance
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
CrossSections σ — string no type_i_FL, type_iii
source for the transient cross-sec- type_i_exp,
tion spectra type_ii_FL,
type_iii_FL,
type_iii_exp,
type_iv_exp,
user-defined
OverlapIntegral Γ — real yes ]0,1] 0.67
effective overlap integral between
the optical power contributions
and the Erbium doping profile,
normalized to a full overlap
FwdPumpPower Pf W real yes [0,∞[ 100.0e-3
forward pump power at the
beginning of fiber
BkwdPumpPower Pb W real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
backward pump power at the end
of fiber
FwdPumpWavelgth λpf m real yes [960⋅10−9,1500⋅ 1480.0e-9
forward pump wavelength 10−9]
BkwdPumpWavelgth λpb m real yes [960⋅10−9,1500⋅ 980.0e-9
backward pump wavelength 10−9]
IncludeNoise — — string yes ON, ON
Selects whether the amplifier Only_Saturat
1. calculates and adds the inter- ion,
nal ASE noise to the output (ON), OFF
2. takes ASE into account only for
internal saturation but does not
add it to the output
3. does not consider ASE noise at
all (OFF).
the total bandwidth in which to
track internal ASE noise
the center frequency of the total
internal ASE noise
PolarizFilterForw — — enum yes X, NONE
employ linear polarization filter Y,
at the forward output NONE
PolarizFilterBack — — enum yes X, NONE
employ linear polarization filter Y,
at the backward output NONE
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
NoiseBinSpacing — Hz real yes [10⋅106 12
,20⋅10 ] 0.3e12
spacing of ASE noise bins to gen-
erate within the specified ASE
noise bandwidth
LogFilenameBase — — string no — edf_dyn
base filename for various result
files
random seed lookup index to use
for noise generation; a value of
zero uses an automatic, unique
seed
defines if the module is active or OFF
not
Description
Purpose of a Dynamic EDFA Module
Usually, optical signals to be amplified have data contents at frequencies well above
the dynamic response frequency of EDFAs. The amplifiers are transparent and qua-
si linear for such high-bitrate systems. However, if these data-bearing signals are
switched on or off, which may be the case in WDM networks, tremendous distortion
of the amplifier gain may occur. The signal envelope exhibits strong transients, and
caused by saturation effects interchannel perturbation through gain crosstalk can
be observed.
This module simulates the gain transients taking into consideration bidirectional
signal and pump power propagation. Caused by the large amount of the fluores-
cence time, transient effect can be investigated only for time intervals above 10ms.
Consequently, the user has to choose a suitably low sample rate to hold the data
processing effort in acceptable limits.
The Transient Model according to A. Bononi and L.A. Rush [1]

Several assumptions are prerequisite for the transient EDFA model:
• The fiber is treated as a lumped block not taking into account location depen-
dent saturation transients.
• To simplify the following equations, a two-level system with Erbium ions popu-
lation densities N1 and N2 (low, high) are presumed. This implies a 1480nm
pump source. For 980nm pumping, the emission cross section is not significant,
due to the rapid non-radiative decay of the pump level to the metastable level.
Consequently, a two-level system is valid even in this case.
• These manifolds are assumed to be homogeneously broadened.
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
backward forward
polarization pump pump polarization
filter, power power filter,
optional coupler coupler optional
dynamic
EDF
pump
λpf lasers λpb
Figure 1. Dynamic EDFA schematic.
• All other parasitic effects such as excited state absorption, fiber background
loss and ion-pair clustering effects are neglected.
Then the rate equation for the fraction of excited ions N2(z,t) at the fiber location z
and time instance t is according to [1] and [2]:
∂N 2 N2 ∂P i
= – ------- – ∑ u i ⁄ ( hνi A ) , (1)
∂t τ ∂z
i
where τ is the fluorescence time, Pi =P(λi,z,t) is the optical power of channel i at
wavelength λi =c/νi and A is the effective core area. Channels propagating in for-
ward direction have ui =1, while those entering the fiber in backward direction have
ui =−1. The pump sources are included in this representation, too.
The propagation equation may be derived from (10) and (11) of the
AmpEDFA_RateEqStat module and hold:
∂Pi
= u i Γ(λ i) [ σ 21(λ i) ⋅ N2 – σ 12(λ i) ⋅ N1 ] ⋅ P i . (2)
∂z
Here Γ(λi) denotes effective overlap integral between the radial optical power distri-
bution and the Erbium doping profile normalized to a full overlap.
After some mathematical transformations (e.g., see [1],[2]) including an integration
along the fiber length, it results a first-order ODE
out in
· ρ(t ) Pi (t) – Pi (t)
ρ(t) = – ---------- – ∑ -------------------------------------
- (3)
τ hνi
i
for the mean inversion
L
ρ ( t ) = A ∫ N 2(z, t) dz .
0
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
In [1], the mean inversion ρ(t) is called “reservoir” which emphasizes the central
meaning of this number for the dynamic behavior of the EDFA.
Note that the definitions of Piout and Piin include the directionality of the fluxes,
therefore obviating the need for the parameter ui. Hence, co- and counterpropagat-
ing pumping are equivalent in this module.
According to (2), the output power Piout relates to the input power Piin by a time-
and wavelength-dependent amplification function Gi(t):
out in in
Pi = G i(t)P i = Pi ⋅ exp(Γ ( σ 12 + σ 21 ) ⋅ ρ ⁄ A – Γσ 12 ⋅ N dop ⋅ L) . (4)
Private communications with A.Bononi gave a hint how to cover the case of EDFA
self-saturation by ASE noise. We assume a location-independent inversion along the
EDFA’s fiber. Then the incremental ASE power ∆PASE can be calculated according
to
∆P ASE = 4 ⋅ nsp ⋅ [ G ASE – 1 ] ⋅ ∆ν ASE ⋅ h ν ASE , (5)
where ∆νASE is the considered bandwidth, GASE the amplification at λASE, and nsp
the spontaneous emission factor defined by
σ 21 ⋅ ρ ( t )
n sp(t) = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- .
( σ 12 + σ 21 ) ⋅ ρ ( t ) – σ 12 ⋅ N dop ⋅ A ⋅ L
The factor of 4 in (5) takes into account both forward and backward ASE with two
polarization components each.
Finally, it results for modeling of the central dynamic EDFA behavior equation:
in
· ρ P i (t)
ρ = – --- – ∑ -------------- [ G i(t) – 1 ] – ∑ 4 ⋅ n sp[ GASE(t) – 1 ] ⋅ ∆νASE . (6)
τ hν i
i ASE
The right summation serves only to include the ASE self-saturation; it is not applied
to have time dependent ASE noise in the output signal.
Numerical Analysis
The numerical analysis of the dynamic reservoir equation (6) needs a discretization
in the wavelength range where the EDFA is considered to be an active device. To
hold the computational load in acceptable limits, the amplification is calculated only
at special wavelengths λi: the center location of each sampled or parametrized chan-
nel and the center location of each input noise bin.
Parameterized signals and input noise bins are treated as time independent loads,
whereas sampled, time dependent signal contributions are responsible for the tran-
sient dynamics. For each sampled channel at λi the ith input power Piin(t) is calcu-
lated.
The subroutine to determine the wavelength-dependent emission and absorption
cross sections is identical to the one in the AmpEDFA_RateEqStat module. Please
refer to the documentation of the AmpEDFA_RateEqStat module for details.
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
The solution of (6) gives back the temporal resolution of the reservoir ρ(t) and via (4)
the time dependent gain Gi(t) for each considered channel. Multiplied with the (for-
ward or backward) input power Piin(t) one obtains the (forward or backward) output
power Piout(t).
dt
During the calculations a mean inversion value ρ = ∫ ρ(t) ----- is derived, which serves
T
to determine the mean gain (or absorption) coefficient of the input parameterized
signals and noise bins according to
G(λ) = exp(Γ ( σ 12 + σ 21 ) ⋅ ρ ⁄ A – Γσ 12 ⋅ Ndop ⋅ L) .
Similarly, the mean spontaneous emission factor
σ 21 ⋅ ρ ( t )
nsp(λ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
( σ 12 + σ 21 )ρ – σ 12 N dop ⋅ A ⋅ L
and the (one-sided) mean ASE noise spectral density
Sforw(λ) = S backw(λ) = 2 ⋅ n sp ⋅ ( G – 1 ) ⋅ hν ASE
applies. The factor of 2 implies the two polarization states.

nameBase is specified. They give the user more background information about the
EDFA operation conditions:
• «LogFilenameBase».ampf and
«LogFilenameBase».ampb contain the forward (.ampf) and backward (.ampb)
dynamic gain Gi(t) in dependence of the time instance. The values are deter-
mined at wavelengths, where a forward (backward) propagating, sampled input
signal contribution is detected.
The data are stored in multicolumn format with one column for each sampled
signal contribution (first column: time instance in s, next columns: dynamic
gain in dB). The columns are ordered with increasing wavelength.
• «LogFilenameBase».den contains the relative density of both excited (ρ′) and
ground-state (1−ρ′) Erbium ions in dependence of the time instance. The data
are stored in three columns (time instance in s, ρ′, 1−ρ′).
• «LogFilenameBase».tcs contains the transition cross-sections σ21 and σ12 in
dependence of the wavelength. The file contains three columns (wavelength
in m, σ21 in m2, σ12 in m2) with either the calculated cross-sections approximat-
ed by the Gaussian or Lorentzian line shapes according to [1] or the cu-
bic-spline-interpolated values originating from the user-defined file
CrossSections.
• FiberLength specifies the length of the Erbium doped fiber.
• CoreRadius specifies the core radius of the Erbium doped fiber.
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
• NumerAperture chooses the numerical aperture of the Erbium doped fiber.

• DopantDensity specifies the doping concentration of the Erbium ions inside
the fiber’s core in 1/m3.
• FluorescenceTime specifies the lifetime of Erbium ions in the excited state.
• InititalInversion specifies the relative number of excited Erbium ions
ρ0′ =ρ(t=0)/(Ndop⋅A⋅L) at the initialization instance.
• CrossSections determines the source for the cross-sections spectra with the
possible pre-defined fiber types type_i_FL, type_i_exp, type_ii_FL, type_iii_FL,
type_iii_exp, and type_iv_exp given in [1] on pp. 250–252 and p. 299. The exten-
sion “FL” denotes the Fuchtbauer-Ladenburg relation whereas the extension
“exp” denotes experimental peak values. Type I corresponds to an Er3+ ger-
manosilicate glass fiber, Types II and III both stand for alumino-germanosili-
cate glass fiber; the concentration of alumina is higher for Type III than for
Type II. Numerically, these cross-sections are approximated by the sum of
Gaussian line shapes with fitting parameters given in [1]. According to [1],
p. 263, the peak value σ12peak /(10−25 m2) of Type I (Type II; III) is 6.1 (5.8; 5.3),
whereas the peak value σ21peak /(10−25 m2) is 8.7 (6.5; 5.8), respectively. Type IV
is the same as Type III with the exception that a Lorentzian fitting of an ab-
sorption and emission cross sections is performed according to [1] with peak
values of σ21peak /(10−25 m2)=4.4 and σ12peak /(10−25 m2)=4.7.
Alternatively, the parameter CrossSections can be a user-defined string spec-
ifying an ASCII file that contains measured or user-defined cross-section data
σ12(λ) and σ21(λ). The format must be columnwise oriented with the first col-
umn containing the wavelength (in m), the second and third σ12 and σ21
(in m2), respectively. The values within a row are separated by spaces resulting
in a format according to:
λ[1] σ12[1] σ21[1]
λ[2] σ12[2] σ21[2]
λ[3] σ12[3] σ21[3]
…
λ[N] σ12[N] σ21[N]
The default value of the parameter CrossSections is $BNROOT/data/
rebolledo.tcs, which contains data of Prof. Rebolledo [4].
• OverlapIntegral specifies the effective value Γ of the overlap integral between
the optical power distributions and the Erbium doping profile normalized to a
full overlap according to equation (11) in the AmpEDFA_RateEqStat module:
˜
Γ
Γ = ------ =
Γ˜0
∫∫ N 2(x, y)Ψ(x, y, λ) dx dy ⁄ Γ˜0 .
Here Γ˜0 is the non-normalized value of the overlap integral for the perfect
matching of the doping and the power distribution with N2(x, y) ∼ Ψ(x, y, λ) .
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
For the present state of this module, the overlap integral is assumed to be
wavelength independent.
• FwdPumpPower defines the forward pump power at the beginning of the fi-
ber.
• BkwdPumpPower specifies the backward pump power at the end of the fiber.
• FwdPumpWavelgth selects the wavelength of the pumping wave travelling
forward inside the Erbium-doped fiber.
• BkwdPumpWavelgth selects the wavelength of the pumping wave travelling
backward inside the Erbium-doped fiber.
• IncludeNoise Selects whether the amplifier
1. calculates and adds the internal ASE noise to the output (ON),
2. takes ASE into account only for internal saturation but does not add it to
the output (Only_Saturation), or
3. does not consider ASE noise at all (OFF).
• The internal ASE noise is calculated only at the user-defined frequency grid
specified by the parameters NoiseBandwidth, NoiseCenterFrequency, and
NoiseBinSpacing.
• The parameters PolarizFilterForw and PolarizFilterBack select whether a
linear polarization filter is integrated at the amplifier’s forward and backward
outputs, respectively, that passes through the selected polarization. Including
polarization filters may accelerate the calculation speed of the succeeding mod-
ules since only one polarization is considered. This procedure can only be ap-
plied if polarization effects do not have to be taken into account for the total
simulation scenario.
• LogFilenameBase is the base filename for the output files with different ex-
tensions generated in the home directory (or user-defined path) during execu-
tion of the module.
• RandomNumberSeed is the seed value for the Wichman-Hill-Generator. If
several noise generating modules are applied in one simulation, the user has to
take care of different seed values to avoid correlated noise sources.
Multiple Band Handling: Input power and associated wavelength of each channel
are detected. The temporal revolution of each power component affects the inversion
transient behavior resulting in a time-dependent gain factor. During the calcula-
tions all channels are up-sampled to the highest sample rate.
Parameterized Signals: These signal contributions are multiplied by the time-av-
eraged, wavelength-dependent gain.
Noise Bin Support: If it is possible and globally allowed, noise bins are incorporat-
ed into the multiple bands. The powers and center wavelengths of the remaining
noise bins are detected as they affect the EDFA’s saturation and gain. The addition-
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
al EDFA’s ASE noise sources the locally generated noise bins, which is added to the
output port, too.
Boundary Conditions: The AmpEDFA_Dynamic module accepts the periodic as
well as the aperiodic boundary conditions in the time domain.
Restart of Simulation: The internal inversion continues from the current state. If
the simulation is restarted again, the same seed values from the lookup table are
used for noise generation. Note that topology changes may change the specific seed
value used by a module.
References
[1] A. BONONI & L.A. RUSCH: Doped-Fiber Amplifier Dynamics: A System Perspec-
tive. Journal of Lightwave Technology 16(5), 1998.
[2] S.R. CHINN: Simplified Modeling of Transients in Gain-Clamped Erbi-
um-Doped Fiber Amplifiers. Journal of Lightwave Technology 16(6), 1998.
KORTQXGF$QPQPKOQFGN
8-
1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Characterization of Optical Filters 8-3
Filter FBG Bidirectional 8-6

Fiber Bragg Grating Filter 8-9
Filter Gaussian (Optical) 8-13
Filter Bessel (Optical) 8-16
Filter Trapezoid (Optical) 8-20
Filter Inverted Trapezoid (Optical) 8-24
%JCTCEVGTK\CVKQPQH1RVKECN(KNVGTU
Ein(f) T(f) Eout(f)
In the transmission direction, optical filters are characterized in the frequency do-
main by their complex transfer function T(f):
jΦ ( f )
T ( f ) = A ( f )e , (7)
where A(f) is the frequency-dependent amplitude, and Φ(f) the phase of the transfer
function. The output and input field are linked by a complex transfer function in the
frequency domain as follows:
E (f) E (f)
 x, out  = T ( f ) ⋅  x, in  . (8)
 E y, out(f)  E y, in(f)
The transformation into the frequency domain and back from the frequency into the
time domain is done by FFT’s.
(KNVGTOQFWNGURCTCOGVGTUGVWR
This section is intended to illustrate the filter modules’ parameter setup. Each set-
up consists of two sets of settable states: The first set holds the parameters giving
the transfer function of the particular filter; the second set is common to all filters
and is used to adjust the filter’s ONSL-specific properties. Sampled bands are di-
rectly filtered either using frequency or time domain filters whereas parameterized
signals are treated as CW signals, i.e., their power is scaled by the filter transfer
function value at the center frequency of the channel. Noise bins are weighted by
the filter transfer function value at the center frequency of the bin.
The states common to all filters are explained below.
0QKUG&[PCOKE
The representation of spectral white noise by means of noise bins, i.e., spectral
bands of distinct bandwidth and associated noise power, requires the adaption of
the bin bandwidth to the spectral response of the filter’s transfer function in order
to keep the approximation error below a certain limit. This means for example that
a single noise bin over the whole simulation bandwidth will be split in several noise
bins to approximately follow the filter transfer function.
The parameter NoiseDynamic (ND) is understood as a threshold, with the follow-
ing relationship:
 T(f) 2 
r = log10  -----------------------
max
- , (9)
2 
 T ( f ) min 
r < ND , (10)
where T(f) is the transfer function of the filter. |T(f)|2max,min specifies the maximum
and minimum values of the transfer function within the spectral region of the noise
bin. The filter module checks whether this condition is true; if the check fails for any
noise bin, the noise bin bandwidth will be resized until condition (9) is fulfilled.
0QKUG6JTGUJQNF
Parameter NoiseThreshold denotes the value of the absolute square of the trans-
fer function, above which the noise bin bandwidth is adapted:
2 2
NTthr = [ log ( T ( f ) ) ] > log ( T ( f ) ) . (11)
This means that noise bins below NoiseThreshold are not affected by NoiseDy-
namic.
#EVKXG(KNVGT$CPFYKFVJ
Parameter ActiveFilterBandwidth denotes the spectral region within which fil-

tering is to be performed (∆fact). The bandwidth specified is assumed to be centered
symmetrically around the filter's center frequency fc:
∆ f act ∆ f act
f c + ------------- ≤ f ≤ f c – ------------- . (12)
2 2
Beyond the active filter bandwidth, the signal is scaled by a constant value of the
transfer function, evaluated at the lower bound and upper bound of the spectral re-
gion, respectively.
&QYPUCORNG6Q#EVKXG(KNVGT$CPFYKFVJ
If parameter DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwidth is set to ON, the filter will

discard all sampled bands that are completely outside the active filter bandwidth
and will try to downsample other bands lying within the active filter bandwidth by a
multiple of two.
%QPUGTXG/GOQT[
If parameter ConserveMemory is set to ON, the transfer function will be computed

only once and be reused each time the module is fired. If it is set to OFF, the transfer
function will be computed each time filtering is done.
6[RKECNRCTCOGVGTUGVQHCHKNVGT
'PJCPEGF5KOWNCVKQP2CTCOGVGTU
NoiseDynamic ND dB real no ]0,∞[ 3.0
oredness” with one single bin
NoiseThreshold NT dB real no ]−∞,0[ -100
maximum attenuation of spectral
regions in which noise bins are adapted
ActiveFilterBandwidth ∆fact Hz real no [0,∞[ 1.0e12
bandwidth in which active filtering is
done; outside this range filtering is lim-
ited to attenuation
DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwi — — enum no ON, OFF
dth OFF
define if to discard sampled bands
beyond the active filter bandwidth
if on, the transfer function is stored, OFF
and reused on consecutive runs
(KNVGT($)$KFKTGEVKQPCN
(KNVGT($)A$K 1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Purpose
The module is a bi-directional FBG Filter. It is a galaxy and consists of two FBG Fil-
ters and two ideal multiplexers which combine rejected and transmitted outputs of
the two FBGs.
Inputs
inForward = optical signal forward propagation
(signal type:Optical Blocks)
inBackward = optical signal backward propagation
Outputs
outForward = optical signal forward propagation
outBackward = optical signal backward propagation
Physical Parameters
Fiber Bragg Grating Filter:
BraggResFreq fBragg Hz real yes ]0,∞ [ 193.1e12
frequency of the Bragg resonance
Rejection — dB real yes ]0,∞[ 30
suppression of side-lobes in the spectral
response
Bandwidth — Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 40e9
filter bandwidth
WDM MUX N-1 Ideal:
InsertionLoss — — real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
specifies the insertion loss of the ideal
multiplexers
oredness” within one single bin
NoiseThreshold — dB real yes ]−∞,0[ -100
ConserveMemory — — string yes ON, OFF
defines if filter transfer function is OFF
stored on consecutive runs or recalcu-
lated
Active — — string yes ON, ON
For a description of the enhanced simulation parameters, see also Characterization

of Optical Filters on page 1.
Description
The galaxy consists of two Fiber Bragg Grating filters FilterFBG and two ideal mul-
tiplexers WDM_MUX_N_1. The initial forward propagating signal (input port in-
Forward) is filtered by the first FBG. The initial backward propagating signal
(input inBackward) is filtered by the second FBG. The resulting forward propagat-
ing signal, which consists of the transmitted output of the first FBG and the reflect-
ed output of the second FBG is combined by an ideal multiplexer. The resulting
backward signal, which consists of the reflected output of the first FBG and the
transmitted output of the second FBG is also combined by an ideal multiplexer. The
multiplexer is characterized by its InsertionLoss. The parameters BraggResFreq,
Rejection, Bandwidth, NoiseDynamic, NoiseThreshold and ConserveMemo-
ry characterize the FBGs.
For a detailed description and information about signal representations, see mod-
ules FilterFBG and WDM_MUX_N_1, from which this galaxy is derived.
(KDGT$TCII)TCVKPI(KNVGT
(KNVGT($) 1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Purpose
This module is a specialisation of the unchirped FBG module designed to provide an
FBG with good filtering characteristics.
Inputs
Outputs
outputTransmitted = optical signal
outputReflected = optical signal
Physical Parameters
BraggResFreq — Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
frequency of the Bragg resonance
Rejection — dB real yes ]0,∞[ 30
suppression of side-lobes in the spec-
tral response
Bandwidth — — real yes ]0,∞[ 4 * BitRate-
filter bandwidth Default
NoiseThreshold — dB real yes ]−∞,0[ -100
regions in which to adapt noise bins
DigitalFilterOrder — — int yes [8,1024]a 128
number of filter coefficient for digital
filter
ConserveMemory — — enum yes ON, OFF
if ON, the transfer function is stored, OFF
and reused on consecutive runs

of Optical Filters on page 8-3.
Description
1.0 delta n
5e-6
1e-5
0.8 1.75e-5
2.5e-5
5e-5
reflectivity
0.6 1e-4
2.5e-4
0.4
0.2
0.0
2000
-0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3
1750 delta n
5e-6
1500 1e-5
1.75e-5
time delay (ps)
1250 2.5e-5
5e-5
1000 1e-4
2.5e-4
750
500
250
0
-0.3 -0.2 -0.1 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3

detuning from Bragg wavelength (nm)
Figure 1. The effect on changing δn on the spectral response of 25mm long uniform
FBGs.
The response of this filter is calculated using the method described for the general
Fibre Bragg Grating Filter. The FBG is designed for use as a narrow-band filter and
is based on the Blackman apodisation function with an apodisation parameter
of 0.19. The centre-frequency, bandwidth, and rejection of the FBG are specified;
these parameters are used to calculate the length and index modulation depth pa-
rameters needed for the generic Unchirped FBG Filter. The rejection of the grating
is taken as the depth of the filter notch (in dB) when the transmission of a broad-
band continuous-wave input in considered. The shape of the reflection spectrum for
an unchirped FBG changes somewhat when the rejection of the filter is increased
(see Figure 1); typically the response tends more towards a top-hat filter as the re-
jection is made larger. For this reason the specified bandwidth denotes the
full-width of the filter response, rather than the width at −3dB. If a filter with a
higher filling factor is required for a given bandwidth then the rejection parameter
should be increased. Note that with this type of filter it is not possible to have a
top-hat spectral response with a modest rejection; such a filter requires a more com-
plex apodisation profile [1].
The primary advantage of the Blackman apodisation profile lies with its strong sup-
pression of side-lobes in the spectral response. It should be noted that gratings of
this type can exhibit a strong dispersive characteristic when the rejection is large
[2],[3],[4]; there is inherently a trade-off between filling factor and in-band disper-
sion.
Comparison of Model to Experimental Results
0
-5
reflectivity (dB)
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
0
-5
reflectivity (dB)
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35
-40
1550.0 1550.1 1550.2 1550.3 1550.4 1550.5
wavelength (nm)
Figure 2. Comparison of measured and simulated response of a 4dB Blackman-apo-

dised unchirped FBG
The measured response of a 4dB Blackman-apodised unchirped FBG with band-

width 0.21nm is compared to the output of this simulation module with the same
parameters in Figure 2. The length is correctly identified as 20mm and the effective
refractive index modulation depth as ∼6⋅10−5. Note that the continuum of the mea-
sured response is an artefact of the limited dynamic range of the measurement sys-
tem.
Please see module Fiber Bragg Grating for detailed information.
References
[1] IBSEN, DURKIN, M.K., COLE, M.J., LAMING, R.I.: Optimised square passband fi-
bre Bragg grating filter with in-band flat group delay response. IEE Electron.
Lett. 34 (8), pp. 800–802 , 1998.
[2] EGGLETON, B.J., LENZ, G., LITCHINITSER, N., PATTERSON, D.B., AND SLUSHER,
R.E.: Implications of Fiber Grating Dispersion for WDM Communication Sys-
tems. IEEE Photon. Tech. Lett. 9 (10), pp. 1403–1405, 1997.
[3] GEIGER, H., IBSEN, M.: Complexity Limitations of Optical Networks from
Out-of-Band Dispersion of Grating Filters. Proc. ECOC ’98, 20–24 September,
Madrid, 1, pp. 405–406, 1998.
[4] IBSEN, M., GEIGER, H., LAMING, R.I.: In-Band Dispersion Limitations of Uni-
form Apodised FibreGratings. Proc. ECOC ’98, 20–24 September, Madrid, 1,
pp. 413–414, 1998.
Acknowledgement
This module was implemented in cooperation with Mike Durkin from Southampton
University, Optoelectronic Research Center.
(KNVGT)CWUUKCP
1RVKECN
(KNVGT)CWUUKCP
1RVKECN
(KNVGT)CWUU$2A1RV 1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Purpose
The module simulates an optical filter with a Gaussian shaped transfer characteris-
tics.
Inputs
Outputs
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency fc Hz real yes ]0,∞[a 193.1e12
center frequency of the optical filter
Bandwidth ∆f3dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[a 4 * BitRate-
3dB bandwidth of the filter Default
GaussianOrder n — int yes [1,∞[a 1.0
Gaussian order of filter
NoiseDynamic ND dB real yes ]0,∞[a 3.0
NoiseThreshold NT dB real yes ]−∞,0[a -100
ActiveFilterBandwidth ∆fact Hz real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e12
bandwidth in which filtering is accu-
rate; outside this range, filtering is
replaced by attenuation
DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwi — — enum yes ON, OFF
dth OFF
defines if sampled bands beyond the
active filter bandwidth are to be dis-
carded
(KNVGT)CWUUKCP
1RVKECN
order of a FIR filter employed for aperi-
odic simulation
ConserveMemory — — enum yes ON, ON
and reused on consecutive calls

Description
A(f)
1
2
fc f
∆f3dB
The filter transfer characteristic is determined by the parameter Bandwidth ∆f3dB,

the parameter CenterFrequency fc and parameter GaussianOrder n of the fil-
ter:
( 2n )
  ( f – f c ) 
T ( f ) = exp  – ln 2  ----------------- , (1)
  fg  
∆ f 3dB
with the assumption of vanishing phase and f g = --------------- .
2
Multiple Bands: If DownsampleToActiveFilterBandwidth is set to ON, bands
lying within the ActiveFilterBandwidth are downsampled to a single band; oth-
erwise, each spectral band is filtered separately with the appropriate filter transfer
function. However, bands lying beyond the active filter bandwidth are weighted
(KNVGT)CWUUKCP
1RVKECN
with a constant value T(f) which is evaluated at the boundaries of the active filter
bandwidth.
Parameterized Signals: Power information of parameterized signals is changed
according to the value of the filter’s transfer function.
Noise Bins: The module’s behavior with respect to the noise signal carried is modi-
fied using the parameters NoiseDynamic and NoiseThreshold, respectively.
range of the filters’s transfer function (i.e., the logarithmic ratio of its maximum to
minimum value) exceeds parameter NoiseDynamic. (2) The attenuation of the fil-
ter in the spectral region of the bin does not exceed the value specified by parameter
NoiseThreshold.
tral components of the input signal is considered since the filter module acts as a
pure linear device.
Boundary Conditions: The filter module may be operated at both periodic and ape-
riodic boundary conditions. Filtering is done in the frequency domain if PERIODIC
is chosen; when set to APERIODIC, the signal is processed in the time domain, us-
ing a windowed FIR-Filter. The overlap-and-save method is applied by the module
only if the following relationship between input blocklength and parameter Digital-
FilterOrder is satisfied:
4N coeffs < N Block
where Nblock denotes the input block length and Ncoeff denotes the number of coeffi-
cients, as given by the parameter named above.
In sample mode (Aperiodic boundary conditions) time domain filtering is applied us-
ing a windowed FIR filter.
function is calculated once being re-used each time the module executed. Otherwise,
the transfer function will be evaluated each run.
Module Deactivation: If the module is deactivated, the input data will simply be
passed through.
(KNVGT$GUUGN
1RVKECN
(KNVGT$GUUGN
1RVKECN
(KNVGT$GUUGN$2A1RV 1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Purpose
The module represents an optical filter with Bessel transfer characteristics.
Inputs
Outputs
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency fc Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
center frequency of the filter.
Bandwidth ∆f3dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 4 * BitRat-
3dB bandwidth of the filter. eDefault
FilterOrder n — int yes [1,100] 3
order of the filter
NoiseDynamic ND dB real yes ]0,∞[ 3.0
NoiseThreshold NT dB real yes ]−∞,0[ -100
ActiveFilterBandwidth ∆fact Hz real yes [0,∞[ 1.0e12
replaced by attenuation
DownsampleToActiveFilterBandw — — enum yes ON, OFF
idth OFF
define if sampled bands beyond the
active filter bandwidth are to be dis-
carded
ConserveMemory — — enum yes ON, ON
(KNVGT$GUUGN
1RVKECN
odic simulation.

Description
An analog Bessel filter is a minimal phase design, i.e., the filter introduces a con-
stant group delay while dispersion is minimized. Thus, the wave shape of the fil-
tered signal in the passband is preserved. The transfer function of the filter is
described by
1 j2f
T(p) = --------------------------------------- ⋅ exp ( j2πf c t ) with p = --------------- , (1)
 j2f c  ∆f 3dB
N n  p – ---------------
 ∆f 3dB
where fc is the center frequency of the filter, and ∆f3dB the full 3dB bandwidth.
N n ( p ) is the denominator polynomial, which can be written for an nth (n>0) order
filter recursively in the form
Bn ( p )
N n ( p ) = ---------------- , (2)
Bn ( 0 )
2
B n ( p ) = ( 2n – 1 )B n – 1 ( p ) + p Bn – 2 ( p ) . (3)
The polynomials B n ( p ) denote the Bessel polynomials [1]. Table 1 shows the first 4
polynomials.
Table 1. Bessel Polynomials Bn ( p ) .

n Bn ( p )
1 1+p
2 3 + 3p + p 2
3 15 + 15p + 6p 2 + p 3
4 105 + 105p + 45p2 + 10p 3 + p 4
: :
(KNVGT$GUUGN
1RVKECN
A(f) Φ(f)
1
-------
2
fc f fc f
0
∆ f3dB
∆ f3dB
Figure 1. Frequency response and phase of a Bessel filter.

with a constant value T(f), which is evaluated at the boundaries of the active filter
bandwidth.
Noise Bins: The module's behavior with respect to the noise signal carried, is mod-
NoiseThreshold.
pure linear device.
(KNVGT$GUUGN
1RVKECN
4N coeffs < N Block
passed through.
References
[1] L. WANGENHEIM: Aktive Filter in RC- und SC-Technik. Hüthig Buch Verlag
GmbH, Heidelberg, 1991.
(KNVGT6TCRG\QKF
1RVKECN
(KNVGT6TCRG\QKF
1RVKECN
(KNVGT6TCRG\$2A1RV 1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Purpose
The module represents an optical filter with a trapezoidal shaped logarithmic am-
plitude transfer characteristic. It’s especially designed for figure of margin applica-
tions.
Inputs
Outputs
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency Center frequency fc Hz real yes ]0,∞[a 193.1e12
of the filter.
Zero_dB_Bandw Zero dB band- ∆f0dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[a 10.0e9
width of the filter.
CutoffMagnitude Attenuation at A dB real yes ]0,∞[a 10.0
the cutoff bandwidth of the filter.
CutoffBandwidth Cutoff band- ∆f(−A)dB Hz real yes ]∆f0dB , ∞[a 100.0e9
NoiseDynamic Maximum allowed ND dB real yes ]0,∞[a 3.0
ratio of noise “coloredness” with one
single bin.
NoiseThreshold Maximum attenu- NT dB real yes ]−∞,0[a -100
ation of spectral regions in which to
adapt noise bins.
ActiveFilterBandwidth Band- ∆fact Hz real yes [0,∞[a 1.0e12
width in which filtering is accurate;
outside this range, filtering is replaced
by attenuation.
(KNVGT6TCRG\QKF
1RVKECN
DownsampleToActiveFilterBandw — — enum yes ON, OFF
idth Define if sampled bands beyond OFF
the active filter bandwidth are to be
discarded.
DigitalFilterOrder The order of a — — int yes [8,1024]a 64
lation.
ConserveMemory If ON, the trans- — — enum yes ON, ON
fer function is stored, and reused on OFF
consecutive calls
Active Defines if the module is active — — enum yes ON, ON
or not OFF

Description
∆f(−A)dB
∆f0dB
fc
0dB f
log[A(f)]
figure of margin
−AdB
The transmission characteristic is given by the parameter Zero_dB_Bandw ∆f0dB,

the parameter CutoffBandwidth ∆f(−A)dB with the attenuation level of (parameter
CutoffMagnitude) A [dB] and the center frequency fc (parameter CenterFre-
quency). The amplitude function is defined as
 1 –A
------ --------------------------------------- ( f – f + )
 10 ∆f ( –A )dB – ∆f0dB
 10 for f > f +

T(f) =  1 for f − ≤ f ≤ f + , (1)

 1 A
------ --------------------------------------- ( f – f − )
 10 ∆f ( –A )dB – ∆f0dB
 10 for f < f −
(KNVGT6TCRG\QKF
1RVKECN
with
∆ f 0dB
f + = f c + --------------- ,
2
∆ f 0dB
f − = f c – --------------- , (2)
2
and phase
Φ(f) = 0 . (3)
with a constant value T(f), which is evaluated at the boundaries of the active filter
bandwidth.
cording to the value of the filter’s transfer function.
NoiseThreshold.
pure linear device.
4N coeffs < N Block
(KNVGT6TCRG\QKF
1RVKECN
passed through.
(KNVGT+PXGTVGF6TCRG\QKF
1RVKECN
1RVKECN
(KNVGT6TCRG\$5A1RV 1RVKECN(KNVGTU($)#9)
Purpose
The module simulates an inverted optical filter with an inverted trapezoidal re-
sponse.
Inputs
Outputs
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency Center fre- fc Hz real yes ]0,∞[a 193.1e12
quency of the filter.
Zero_dB_Bandw Zero dB band- ∆f0dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[a 10.0e9
CutoffMagnitude Attenuation at A dB real yes ]0,∞[a 10.0
the cutoff bandwidth of the filter.
CutoffBandwidth Cutoff band- ∆f(−A)dB Hz real yes >∆f0dB 100.0e9
NoiseDynamic The maximum ND dB real no ]0,∞[a 1.0
allowed ratio of noise “coloredness”
with one single bin.
NoiseThreshold The maximum NT dB real no ]−∞,0[a -100
attenuation of spectral regions in
which to adapt noise bins.
ActiveFilterBandwidth The ∆fact Hz real no [0,∞[a 1.0e12
replaced by attenuation.
DigitalFilterOrder The order of — — int no [8,1024]a 64
a FIR filter employed for aperiodic
simulation
1RVKECN
ConserveMemory If ON, the — — enum no ON, ON
transfer function is stored, and OFF
reused on consecutive calls
Active Defines if the module is — — enum no ON, ON
active or not OFF

Description
0dB
log[A(f)]
fc
∆f0dB f
∆f(−A)dB
The transfer function is given by
T(f) = ˜ (f) 2 ,
1–T (1)
with
 1 –A
------ ---------------------------------------- ( f – f + )
 10 ∆f ( –A )dB – ∆f0dB
 10 for f > f +
˜ 
T(f) =  1 for f − ≤ f ≤ f + , (2)

 1 A
------ ---------------------------------------- ( f – f − )
 10 ∆f ( –A )dB – ∆f0dB
 10 for f < f −
and
1RVKECN
∆ f 0dB
f + = f c + --------------- ,
2
∆ f 0dB
f − = f c – --------------- . (3)
2
A phase
Φ(f) = 0 (4)
is assumed. ∆f0dB describes the parameter Zero_dB_Bandw and ∆f(−A)dB the pa-
rameter CutoffBandwidth at the attenuation level −A [dB] (parameter Cutoff-
Magnitude). fc is the parameter CenterFrequency.
Multiple Bands: Bands lying within the ActiveFilterBandwidth are filtered
separately with the appropriate filter transfer function. However, bands lying be-
yond the active filter bandwidth are weighted with a constant value T(f), which is
evaluated at the boundaries of the active filter bandwidth.
NoiseThreshold.
pure linear device.
4N coeffs < N Block
1RVKECN
passed through.
1RVKECN
9-
2CUUKXG%QORQPGPVU
Attenuator 9-3
X Coupler 9-5
Isolator Ideal 9-7
Circulator Clockwise Non-Ideal 9-8
#VVGPWCVQT
#VVGPWCVQT
#VVGPWCVQT 2CUUKXG%QORQPGPVU
Purpose
The module attenuates the optical signal.
Inputs
Outputs
Physical Parameters
Attenuation a dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
power attenuation
Description
The input field Ein is attenuated with the power Attenuation a as follows:
–-----a-
20
E out,ν ( t ) = E in ( t ) ⋅ 10 . (1)
The parameter Active specifies if the module is active or not.

Single and Multiple Bands: For each band, the output field is calculated according
to equation (1).
Parameterized Signals: The power of each parametrized signal is attenuated by a
factor 10−a/10.
Noise Bins: Noise bins are attenuated by 10−a/10.
#VVGPWCVQT

The output field is calculated like in the case of the sampled band signals.
:%QWRNGT
:%QWRNGT
:A%QWRNGT 2CUUKXG%QORQPGPVU
Purpose
The module models an optical coupler for combining or splitting of optical signals. It
can also be used as a physical signal splitter for signal check.
Inputs
input1 = optical signal
input2 = optical signal
Outputs
output1 = optical signal
output2 = optical signal
Physical Parameters
CoupleFactor α — real yes [0,1] 0.5
specifies the cross- coupling coefficient,
from port 1 to port 2
Description
Single or Multiple Bands: The cross coupler is defined by its transmission
matrix [1]
 E 1, out  1–α j α  E1, in

  =   ⋅ , (1)
 E 2, out j α 1 – α  E2, in
with the CoupleFactor α. E1,in and E2,in are the input electrical fields and E1,out
and E2,out are the output fields at the ports 1 and 2 of the coupler, respectively.
Parameterized Signals: The parameterized signals are considered to be uncorre-
lated. Thus, the operation of the coupler for signals of this signal type is described
by the following transfer matrix
:%QWRNGT
 P1, out 1–α α  P 1, in

  =  ⋅ 
 P2, out α 1 – α  P 2, in
where P1,2 out and P1,2 in are the input and output signal powers.
Noise Bins: The effect of the X Coupler on noise bins is described by the same ma-
trix as for the parameterized signals.
Interactions between differently represented signals: Since the module performs a
linear operation, there are no interactions between different spectral components.
In particular, there are no interactions between signal parts represented by bands,
parameterized signals, and noise bins.
Boundary Conditions: Both, periodic and aperiodic boundary conditions are sup-
ported.
Each sample is processed similar to single or multiple bands, see equation (1).
References
[1] R. MÄRZ: Integrated Optics: Design and Modeling. Artech House, Boston, 1994,
p. 183.
+UQNCVQT+FGCN
+UQNCVQT+FGCN
+UQNCVQT+FGCN 2CUUKXG%QORQPGPVU
Purpose
The module acts an ideal isolator.
Inputs
inForward = optical signal
inBackward = optical signal
Outputs
outForward = optical signal
Physical Parameters
InsertionLoss a dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
defines the insertion loss of the
module
Description
The module is implemented as a galaxy and consists of two attenuators. As shown
in Figure 1 the signal at the input inForward is attenuated by the attenuator. The
attenuation is specified by the parameter InsertionLoss. The backward propagat-
ing signal at the input inBackward is dropped to ground.
Figure 1. Implementation of the galaxy
%KTEWNCVQT%NQEMYKUG0QP+FGCN
%KTEWNCVQT%Y0QP+FGCN 2CUUKXG%QORQPGPVU
Purpose
This module simulates a non-ideal clockwise circulator.
Terminals
in1 = optical input forward at port 1
Outputs
out1 = optical input forward at port 1
Physical Parameters
InsertionLoss — dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
Rejection — dB real yes [0,∞[ 30
Description and Signal Representation

This module simulates a non-ideal clockwise circulator. It is a combination of the
ideal modules CirculatorCwSys and CirculatorCcwSys, taking into account
cross-talk propagating in counter-clockwise direction. This cross-talk is specified by
the parameter Rejection in dB. The insertion loss in nominal clockwise propaga-
tion direction is specified by the parameter InsertionLoss in dB.
For a more detailed description of this module together with the signal representa-
tion, see the modules CirculatorCwSys and CirculatorCcwSys.
InsertionLoss
in1 out3
Port 1 Port 3
out1 in3
InsertionLoss
InsertionLoss
in2 out2
Port 2
Figure 1. Schematic of the nominal behaviour of the non-ideal clockwise circulator
in1 Rejection out3
Port 1 Port 3
out1 in3
Rejection
Rejection
out2 in2
Port 2
Figure 2. Schematic of the cross-talk behaviour of the non-ideal clockwise circulator
10-
1RVKECN0GVYQTM'NGOGPVU
Dispersion Management (Postcompensation, 2 Amplifiers) 10-3

Dispersion Management (Precompensation, 2 Amplifiers) 10-8
Frequency Converter (SOA and FWM) 10-13

Frequency Converter (SOA and XGM) 10-16
WADM Ideal 10-19
&KURGTUKQP/CPCIGOGPV
2QUVEQORGPUCVKQP#ORNKHKGTU
&KUR/PI2QUV#OR 1RVKECN0GVYQTM'NGOGPVU
Purpose
The module constructs a fiber link using a dispersion compensating fiber to balance
the dispersion of the transmission fiber and two EDFAs to compensate the fiber
losses. This module is a galaxy and consists of two system level amplifiers and two
NLS fibers.
Inputs
input = input optical signal
Outputs
output = output optical signal
Physical Parameters
SMF and DCF fibers:
SMF_ReferenceFrequency fref,SMF Hz real no ]0,∞[ 192e12
SMF parameters
DCF_ReferenceFrequency fref,DCF Hz real no ]0,∞[ 192e12
DCF parameters
SMF_Length LSMF m real yes [0,∞] SMF_Length
length of the SMF
DCF_Length LDCF m real yes [0,∞] DCF_Length
length of the DCF
SMF_Attenuation aSMF dB/m real no [0,10-1] 0.2e-3
attenuation of the SMF
DCF_Attenuation aDCF dB/m real no [0,10-1] 0.6e-3
attenuation of the DCF
SMF_Dispersion DSMF s/m2 real no [−5⋅10-4,5⋅10-4] 16.0e-6
dispersion coefficient of the
SMF
DCF_Dispersion DDCF s/m2 real no [−5⋅10-4,5⋅10-4] -90.0e-6
DCF
3 3 3
SMF_DispersionSlope SSMF s/m real no [−10 ,10 ] 0.08e3
cient of the SMF
DCF_DispersionSlope SDCF s/m3 real no [−103,103] 0.21e3
cient of the DCF
SMF_NonlinearIndex n2,SMF m2/W real no [0,5⋅10-20] 2.6e-20
non-linearity coefficient of
the SMF
DCF_NonlinearIndex n2,DCF m2/W real no [0,5⋅10-20] 4.0e-20
non-linearity coefficient of
the DCF
SMF_CoreArea Aeff,SMF m2 real no [0,10-7] 80.0e-12
effective core area of the SMF
DCF_CoreArea Aeff,DCF m2 real no [0,10-7] 30.0e-12
effective core area of the DCF
SMF_Tau1 τ1,SMF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 12.2e-15
first adjustable parameter for
Raman response function of
SMF
DCF_Tau1 τ1,DCF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 12.2e-15
DCF
SMF_Tau2 τ2,SMF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 32e-15
second adjustable parameter
for Raman response func-
tionof SMF
DCF_Tau2 τ2,DCF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 32e-15
second adjustable parameter
for Raman response function
of DCF
SMF_RamanCoefficent fr,SMF — real no [0,1] 0.0
fractional contribution of the
delayed Raman response of
SMF
DCF_RamanCoefficent fr,DCF — real no [0,1] 0.0
DCF
SMF_AttFileName — — filename no —
quency for SMF
DCF_AttFileName — — filename no —
quency for DCF
System amplifiers:
SMF_Gain GSMF dB real yes [10log(2),∞[ SMF_Gain
gain of the amplifier succeed-
ing the SMF
DCF_Gain GDCF dB real yes [10log(2),∞[ DCF_Gain
gain of the amplifier succeed-
ing the DCF
SMF_IncludeNoise — — enum no ON, OFF ON
selects if the amplifier suc-
ceeding the SMF really
include noise.
DCF_IncludeNoise — — enum no ON, OFF ON
selects if the amplifier suc-
ceeding the DCF really
include noise.
SMF_NoiseFigure — dB real yes [0,∞[ 6.0
noise figure of the amplifier
succeeding the SMF
DCF_NoiseFigure — dB real yes [0,∞[ 6.0
noise figure of the amplifier
succeeding the DCF
SMF_NoiseBandwidth — Hz real no [0,∞[ 0.0
total bandwidth in which the
ASE noise is considered in
the amplifier succeeding the
SMF
DCF_NoiseBandwidth — Hz real no [0,∞[ 0.0
DCF
SMF_NoiseCenterFrequen — Hz real no [0,∞[ 193.1e12
cy
the center frequency of the
total bandwidth in which
SMF
DCF_NoiseCenterFrequen — Hz real no [0,∞[ 193.1e12
cy
the center frequency of the
total bandwidth in which
DCF
SMF and DCF fibers:
SMF_MaxStepWidth ∆zmax,S m real no ]0,∞[ 1e3
maximum step width of the SMF MF
DCF_MaxStepWidth ∆zmax, m real no ]0,∞[ 1e3
maximum step width of the DCF DCF
SMF_MaxPhaseChange ∆φnl,SM deg real no ]0,30] 0.05
maximum phase change of the SMF F
DCF_MaxPhaseChange ∆φnl,DC deg real no ]0,30] 0.05
maximum phase change of the DCF F
Active — — enum yes ON,OFF ON
defines whether the module is active or
not.
SMF and DCF fibers:
SMF_JoinSignalBands — — enum no NO,YES YES
defines whether to join all sampled sig-
nal bands to one signal band in SMF
DCF_JoinSignalBands — — enum no NO,YES YES
SMF_AddNoiseBinsToSignal — — enum no NO,YES YES
defines whether to incorporate noise
bins into signal bands in SMF if appli-
cable
DCF_AddNoiseBinsToSignal — — enum no NO,YES YES
cable
System amplifiers:
SMF_RandomNumberSeed — — int no [0,10000] 0
random seed lookup index to use for
noise generation in the amplifier suc-
ceeding the SMF. A value of zero uses
an automatic, unique seed.
DCF_RandomNumberSeed — — int no [0,10000] 0
ceeding the DCF. A value of zero uses
SMF_NoiseBinSpacing — Hz real no [10⋅106,10⋅1 0.2e12
spacing of ASE noise bins in the ampli- 012]
fier succeeding the SMF
DCF_NoiseBinSpacing — Hz real no [10⋅106,10⋅1 0.2e12
fier succeeding the DCF
Description
The dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) is postcompensating the dispersion of the

single mode fiber (SMF). The gain of the EDFA following the SMF compensates the
fiber loss of the SMF and can be determined by:
G = aSMF ⋅ L SMF . (1)
For the gain of the amplifier succeeding the DCF a similar equation holds on. Focus-
sing on linear dispersive compensation the length LDCF of the DCF should be chosen
to compensate completely the dispersion of the SMF:
LSMF ⋅ D SMF
L DCF = ------------------------------------ . (2)
– D DCF
This module is thought as a simple realization of a dispersion managed network ele-

ment for fiber links. The EDFA behind the SMF is necessary to compensate the loss-
es of a longer transmission fiber. The EDFA behind the DCF is necessary to
compensate the losses in DCF.
For the EDFA a system gain-controlled model is chosen, which neglects the satura-
tion by ASE. Therefore, no optical filters have to be applied in the structure. The
seed value DCF_RandomNumberSeed of the ASE noise generator should be cho-
sen to be different for different amplifiers, to prevent correlation of their noise. Also
zero seed value can be used for this purpose, which automatically guarantees the
statistical independence of the different noise sources. This module represents a hi-
erarchial design (called a “galaxy” in Ptolemy). For the detailed explanation of the
module parameters please see a description of FiberNLS and AmpSysOpt.
2TGEQORGPUCVKQP#ORNKHKGTU
&KUR/PI2TG#OR 1RVKECN0GVYQTM'NGOGPVU
Purpose
The module constructs a fiber link using a dispersion compensating fiber to balance
the dispersion of the transmission fiber and two EDFAs to compensate the fiber
losses. This module is a galaxy and consists of two system-level amplifiers and two
NLS fibers.
Inputs
input = input optical signal
Outputs
output = output optical signal
Physical Parameters
DCF and SMF fibers:
DCF_ReferenceFrequency fref,DC Hz real no ]0,∞[ 192e12
reference frequency for the DCF F
parameters
SMF_ReferenceFrequency fref,SM Hz real no ]0,∞[ 192e12
reference frequency for the SMF F
parameters
DCF_Length LDCF m real yes [0,∞] DCF_Length
length of the DCF
SMF_Length LSMF m real yes [0,∞] SMF_Length
length of the SMF
DCF_Attenuation aDCF dB/m real no [0,10-1] 0.6e-3
attenuation of the DCF
SMF_Attenuationa aSMF dB/m real no [0,10-1] 0.2e-3
ttenuation of the SMF
DCF_Dispersion DDCF s/m2 real no [−5⋅10-4,5⋅10-4] -90.0e-6
dispersion coefficient of the DCF
SMF_Dispersion DSMF s/m2 real no [−5⋅10-4,5⋅10-4] 16.0e-6
SMF
SMF_DispersionSlope SSMF s/m3 real no [−103,103] 0.08e3
cient of the SMF
3 3 3
DCF_DispersionSlope SDCF s/m real no [−10 ,10 ] 0.21e3
cient of the DCF
DCF_NonlinearIndex n2,DCF m2/W real no [0,5⋅10-20] 4.0e-20
non-linearity coefficient of the
DCF
SMF_NonlinearIndex n2,SMF m2/W real no [0,5⋅10-20] 2.6e-20
non-linearity coefficient of the
SMF
DCF_CoreArea Aeff,DC m2 real no [0,10-7] 30.0e-12
effective core area of the DCF F
SMF_CoreArea Aeff,SM m2 real no [0,10-7] 80.0e-12
effective core area of the SMF F
DCF_Tau1 τ1,DCF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 12.2e-15
DCF
SMF_Tau1 τ1,SMF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 12.2e-15
SMF
DCF_Tau2 τ2,DCF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 32e-15
second adjustable parameter for
Raman response functionof DCF
SMF_Tau2 τ2,SMF s real no [1⋅10-15,50⋅10-15] 32e-15
second adjustable parameter for
Raman response functionof
SMF
DCF_RamanCoefficent fr,DCF — real no [0,1] 0.0
delayed Raman response of DCF
SMF_RamanCoefficent fr,SMF — real no [0,1] 0.0
SMF
DCF_AttFileName — — file- no — —
file for attenuation vs. frequency name
for DCF
SMF_AttFileName — — file- no — —
file for attenuation vs. frequency name
for SMF
System amplifiers:
SMF_Gain GSMF dB real yes [10log(2),∞[ SMF_Gain
gain of the amplifier succeeding
the SMF
DCF_Gain GDCF dB real yes [10log(2),∞[ DCF_Gain
gain of the amplifier succeeding
the DCF
SMF_IncludeNoise — — enum no ON, OFF ON
selects if the amplifier succeed-
ing the SMF really include
noise.
DCF_IncludeNoise — — enum no ON, OFF ON
selects if the amplifier succeed-
ing the DCF really include
noise.
SMF_NoiseFigure — dB real yes [0,∞[ 6.0
noise figure of the amplifier suc-
ceeding the SMF
DCF_NoiseFigure — dB real yes [0,∞[ 6.0
noise figure of the amplifier suc-
ceeding the DCF
SMF_NoiseBandwidth — Hz real no [0,∞[ 0.0
ASE noise is considered in the
amplifier succeeding the SMF
DCF_NoiseBandwidth — Hz real no [0,∞[ 0.0
ASE noise is considered in the
amplifier succeeding the DCF
SMF_NoiseCenterFrequency — Hz real no [0,∞[ 193.1e12
bandwidth in which ASE noise
is considered in the amplifier
succeeding the SMF
DCF_NoiseCenterFrequency — Hz real no [0,∞[ 193.1e12
bandwidth in which ASE noise
is considered in the amplifier
succeeding the DCF
DCF and SMF fibers:
DCF_MaxStepWidth ∆zmax,DCF m real no ]0,∞[ 1e3
maximum step width of the DCF
SMF_MaxStepWidth ∆zmax,SMF m real no ]0,∞[ 1e3
maximum step width of the SMF
DCF_MaxPhaseChange ∆φnl,DCF deg real no ]0,30] 0.05
maximum phase change of the DCF
SMF_MaxPhaseChangem ∆φnl,SMF deg real no ]0,30] 0.05
aximum phase change of the SMF
Active — — enum yes ON,OFF ON
defines whether the module is active or
not.
DCF and SMF fibers:
DCF_JoinSignalBands — — enum no NO,YES YES
SMF_JoinSignalBands — — enum no NO,YES YES
DCF_AddNoiseBinsToSignal — — enum no NO,YES YES
cable
SMF_AddNoiseBinsToSignal — — enum no NO,YES YES
cable
System amplifiers:
SMF_RandomNumberSeed — — int no [0,10000] 0
ceeding the SMF. A value of zero uses
DCF_RandomNumberSeed — — int no [0,10000] 0
ceeding the DCF. A value of zero uses
SMF_NoiseBinSpacing — Hz real no [10⋅106,10⋅1 0.2e12
fier succeeding the SMF
DCF_NoiseBinSpacing — Hz real no [10⋅106,10⋅1 0.2e12
fier succeeding the DCF
Description
The dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) is precompensating the accumulated dis-

persion of the single mode fiber (SMF). The gain G of the EDFA following the DCF
is balancing the fiber loss of the DCF and can be determined by:
G = a DCF ⋅ LDCF . (1)
For the gain of the amplifier succeeding the SMF a similar equation holds. Focus-
sing on linear dispersive compensation the length LDCF of the DCF should be chosen
to compensate the dispersion of the SMF:
L SMF ⋅ D SMF
LDCF = – ------------------------------------ . (2)
D DCF
This module is thought as a simple realization of a dispersion managed network ele-

ment for fiber links. The EDFA behind the DCF is necessary to compensate com-
pletely the losses of DCF. The EDFA behind the SMF is necessary to compensate
the losses in the SMF.
For the EDFA a system gain-controlled model is chosen, which neglects the satura-
tion by ASE. Therefore, no optical filters have to be applied in the structure. The
seed value DCF_RandomNumberSeed of the ASE noise generator should be cho-
sen to be different for different amplifiers, to prevent correlation of their noise. Also
zero seed value can be used for this purpose, which automatically guarantees the
statistical independence of the different noise sources. This module represents a hi-
erarchial design (called a “galaxy” in Ptolemy) . For the detailed explanation of the
module parameters please see a description of FiberNLS and AmpSysOpt.
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF(9/
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF(9/
(TGSWGPE[5JKHV51#A(9/ 1RVKECN0GVYQTM'NGOGPVU
Purpose
This module simulates a frequency converter based on four-wave mixing in semicon-
ductor-optical amplifiers.
Inputs
data_in = optical input signal.
cw_in = pump wave
Outputs
data_out = optical output signal.
Physical Parameters
InputFrequency — Hz real — — 193.1e12-Chan
center frequency of the input signal nelSpacing
OutputFrequency — Hz real — — 193.1e12+Chan
center frequency of the output (con- nelSpacing
verted) signal
PumpFrequency — Hz real — — 193.1e12
frequency of the pump wave
ChannelSpacing — Hz real — — 100e9
frequency offset between WDM
channels
Multiplexer:
Bandwidth ∆f3dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 25e9
3dB bandwidth of Bessel filters
applied to each input channel
InsertionLoss i-o dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
insertion loss
FilterOrder N — int yes [1,100] 3
order of the filter
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF(9/
NoiseDynamic ND dB real no ]0,∞[ 1.0
NoiseThreshold NT dB real no ]−∞,0[ -100
ActiveFilterBandwidth ∆fact Hz real no [0,∞[ 1.0e12
bandwidth of the filter models; out-
side this range, the signal is attenu-
ated by a constant amount
DownsampleToActiveFilterBan — — enum no ON, ON
dwidth OFF
beyond the active filter bandwidth
OutputFilter — — enum yes ON, ON
defines if the output filter is active OFF
or not
Description
At the input the signal wave with InputFrequency fin is multiplexed with the
more intensive pump wave with center frequency PumpFrequency fpump. The re-
sulting signal is launched into the semiconductor optical amplifier (SOA). The beat-
ing of light intensity with a difference frequency ∆f = fpump − fin (see Figure 1) leads
to the carrier density pulsation (CDP) because of the stimulated emission (see de-
scription of module AmpSOA). Since both the gain and refractive index in the SOA
depend on the carrier density the CDP results in the modulation of the pump wave
and generation of the side band at frequency fpump + ∆f = 2 fpump − fin.
channel spacing
f in + f out
f pump = ----------------------
2
fin fpump fout
Figure 1. Center frequencies of pump-wave and in - and output signals
The new frequency is selected at the output with a demultiplexer whose output fre-
quency is set to OutputFrequency fout and in the optimum case fout = 2 fpump− fin.
Since the intensity of the mixing product is usually rather small the output signal is
amplified int the second SOA.
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF(9/
Signal representations
The effect of CDP can be taken into account by SOA properly if both the pump and
signal waves are in the same single frequency sample band. For this purpose all fre-
quency bands are joined in the input multiplexer.
Comment
1) An advantage of the frequency conversion based on FWM in comparison with oth-
er schemes consists in its transparency with respect to the input signal. E.g. the
conversion is insensitive to the modulation format (RZ, NRZ), kind of modulation
(PM, FM, AM) etc.
2) The current model of SOA takes into account the carrier density pulsation (CDP)
but neglects some smaller nonlinearities, like carrier heating (CH) and spectral hole
(SHB). Despite their lower efficiency these effects can become important for large
frequency shifts of the order of 1 THz due to the small relaxation time in comparison
with CDP.
However, the total efficiency remains small. For large frequency shifts other conver-
sion schemes, e.g. based on cross phase modulation (see module Frequency Convert-
er XPM) or cross gain modulation (see module Frequency Converter XGM) should
be used.
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF:)/
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF:)/
(TGSWGPE[5JKHV51#A:)/ 1RVKECN0GVYQTM'NGOGPVU
Purpose
This module simulates a frequency converter based on the effect of cross gain modu-
lation in a semiconductor optical amplifier.
Inputs
data_in = optical input signal.
cw_in = cw signal
Outputs
output = optical output signal.
Physical Parameters
InputFrequency — Hz real — ]0,∞[ 193.1e12-0.5*
center frequency of the input signal 1e12
OutputFrequency — Hz real — ]0,∞[ 193.1e12+0.5*
center frequency of the output sig- 1e12
nal
Multiplexer
Bandwidth ∆f3dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 100e9
3dB bandwidth of Bessel filters
applied to each input channel
FilterOrder — — int no [0,100] 3
order of the bessel filter
InsertionLoss i-o dB real yes [0,∞[ 0.0
insertion loss
Amplifier
InjectionCurrent I A real yes [0,1] 0.15
injection current of SOA
Length L m real yes ]0,10−3] 500.0e-6
length of the amplifier
Width w m real yes ]0,50⋅10−6] 3.0e-6
width of the active layer
Height d m real yes ]0,5⋅10−6] 80.0e-9
height of the active layer
OptConfinement Γ — real yes ]0,1] 0.15
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF:)/
InternalLosses αs 1/m real yes [0,5⋅104] 40.0e2
waveguide losses
DifferentialGain dg/dN m2 real yes ]0,50⋅10−20] 2.78e-20
differential modal gain
CarrierDensityTransp Ntr m−3 real yes ]0,5⋅1025] 1.4e24
carrier density at the transparency
point
IndexToGainCoupl α — real yes [−20,20] 5.0
RecombConstA A 1/s real yes [0,1011] 1.43e8
recombination coefficient A
RecombConstB B m3/s real yes ]0,10−13] 1.0e-16
recombination coefficient B
RecombConstC C m6/s real yes ]0,10−37] 3.0e-41
recombination coefficient C
InitCarrierDens — m−3 real no ]0,5⋅1025] 3.0e24
Amplifier
maximum number of iterations
when solving the differential equa-
tion
relative accuracy of the solution of
the differential equation
InitialStepWidth — s real yes [10−15,10−9] 1.0e-12
trial time step size for the numeri-
cal solution of the differential equa-
tion
minimum allowed time step when
solving the differential equation
Multiplexer
NoiseDynamic — dB real no ]0,∞[ 3.0
maximum allowed ratio of noise
“coloredness” within one single bin
NoiseThreshold — dB real no ]−∞,0[ -100
regions in which noise bins are
adapted
(TGSWGPE[%QPXGTVGT
51#CPF:)/
ActiveFilterBandwidth — Hz real no [0,∞[ 1.0e12
bandwidth in which filtering is
done; outside this range filtering is
limited to attenuation
DownsampleToActiveFilterBa — — enum no ON, OFF
ndwidth OFF
beyond the filter bandwidth
if ON, the transfer function is inter- OFF
nally stored, and reused for consec-
utive runs
Active_Filter1 — — enum yes ON, ON
defines if the Filter 1 is active or OFF
not
Active_Filter2 — — enum yes ON, ON
defines if the Filter 2 is active or OFF
not
Amplifier
Active_SOA — — enum yes ON, OFF ON
defines whether the amplifier is
active or not
Description
The input signal with the InputFrequency and a cw-wave with the OutputFre-
quency are multiplexed and then launched into the SOA. The variation of the light
intensity of the input signal (e.g. due to the AM modulation) leads to the fluctuation
of the carrier density because of the stimulated emission and dynamic saturation of
SOA, see description of AmpSOA (page 7-25).
The change of the carrier density results in the change of amplifier gain and conse-
quently in the change of the output intensity of the input cw wave. The demultiplex-
er selects this wave and gives it to the output port.
Note, that the converter inverts the bit sequence, e.g. the bits “1” become “0” and
vice versa. This is because the higher input intensity results in a larger depletion of
the carrier density and therefore lower gain and output intensities.
9#&/+FGCN
9#&/+FGCN
9&/A#&/ 1RVKECN0GVYQTM'NGOGPVU
Purpose
This module represents a system model of the WDM add/drop multiplexer for add-
ing and dropping a single chanel.
Inputs
in = input optical signal
add = optical signal to be added
Outputs
out = output optical signal
drop = dropped optical signal
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency fc Hz real — ]−∞,∞[ 193.1e12
center frequency of the trapezoid filters
Zero_dB_Bandw ∆f0dB Hz real — ]0,∞[ 10.0e9
zero dB bandwidth of the trapezoid fil-
ters
CutoffMagnitude A dB real — ]0,∞[ 10.0
attenuation at the cutoff frequency of
the trapezoid filters
CutoffBandwidth ∆f(-A)dB Hz real — >∆f0dB 100.0e9
cutoff bandwidth of the trapezoid filter
Add multiplexer:
InsertionLoss_in_out in−out dB real — [0,∞[ 0.0
insertion loss of the channels passed
through WADM
InsertionLoss_in_drop in−drop dB real — [0,∞[ 0.0
insertion loss of the dropped channel
Drop multiplexer:
InsertionLoss_add_out add-out dB real — [0,∞[ 0.0
insertion loss of the dropped channel
9#&/+FGCN
single bin
NoiseThreshold Maximum attenu- — dB real no ]∞,0[ -100.0
ation of spectral regions in which noise
bins are adapted
ChannelPowerThreshold Power — W real no [0,∞[ 1.0e-6
below which channels are discarded
after filtering
ActiveFilterBandwidth Band- — Hz real no [0,∞[ 1.0e12
attenuation
DownsampleToActiveFilterBand- — — enum no ON, OFF
width If on, the transfer function is OFF
stored, and may be reused on conse-
quent runs
function is stored, and may be reused OFF
on consecutive runs
Description
Figure 1. Implementation model of the ideal WDM add-drop multiplexer.
The WDM add-drop multiplexer (WADM) drops the channel having the specified
CenterFrequency from the input WDM comb to the drop port. A new signal with
the same frequency is added to the input signal onto the location in signal spectrum
which becomes free after the drop operation. The resulting signal is passed to the
WADM output. The WDM channels with different frequencies with respect to the
CenterFrequency of the filter are not or to a little extent affected by the WADM.
The system model of an ideal WADM is built from the ideal WDM Coupler Add and
WDM Coupler Drop as shown in Figure 1 explaining the operation of the WADM.
The WDM Coupler Add and WDM Coupler Drop are built from the Filter Trapezoid
(Optical), Filter Inverted Trapezoid (Optical) and Attenuator. Thus, the WADM
9#&/+FGCN
model demonstrates a hierarchial design, which is called “galaxy” in Ptolemy. The

model parameters are taken from its sub-components, for the detailed explanations
see description of the above mentioned modules.
The most important characteristics of the trapezoidal filters for the WADM opera-
tion are defined by parameters Zero_dB_Bandw ∆f0 dB, CutoffBandwidth
∆f(-A)dB and CutoffMagnitude A [dB].
Spectral plot:
insertion loss in−drop

insertion loss in−out
insertion loss add−out
0dB
WDM channel
log[A(f)]
“add” Filter filter
“drop” Filter
−A dB
fc f
∆f0dB
∆f(−A)dB
Figure 2. Transfer function of the ideal WDM add-drop multiplexer.
Figure 2 demonstrates the transfer function of the WADM and explains parameters
determining the different kinds of insertion losses.
• Insertion loss: in-out @ center frequency fc.
• Insertion loss: in-drop @ center frequency fc.
• Insertion loss: add-out @ center frequency fc.
Please see description of the module sub-components.
9#&/+FGCN
Comments:
If the trapezoid filters used in this module are replaced by Filter Measured (Opti-
cal), an actual measured WADM can be simulated.
11-
1RVKECN4GEGKXGTU
Photodiode PIN 11-3

Clock Recovery Ideal 11-6
2JQVQFKQFG2+0
2JQVQFKQFG2+0
2JQVQFKQFG2+0 1RVKECN4GEGKXGTU
Purpose
The module acts as a PIN photodiode with additive gaussian white noise sources.
Inputs
Outputs
Physical Parameters
Responsivity r A/W real yes [0,2] 1.0
responsivity of the photodiode
ThermalNoise Nth A ⁄ Hz real yes [0,100·10−12] 10.0e-12
thermal noise
DarkCurrent id A real yes [0,10·10−6] 0.0
dark current
ShotNoise — — enum yes ON, ON
switch shot noise ON or OFF OFF
unique seed
Description
The module converts the incident optical field into an electrical signal. Since at the
input, several separated sampled optical bands may be present, all optical bands
are joined to one sampled optical band. Noise Bins falling within the combined sam-
pled band’s bandwidth are added after conversion to random Gaussian optical
fields. The combined optical field E(t) is then converted into an optical power Ps(t)
by taking its modulus squared, and converting to an electrical signal as described
below.
2JQVQFKQFG2+0
For modeling a PIN photodetector, the process of converting the optical intensity
into an electrical current is described by
i ( t ) = i s ( t ) + n sh ( t ) + nth ( t ) + i d . (1)
In this equation:
• With the Responsivity r the output signal current is(t) is directly related to
the absorbed optical power Ps(t) by i s ( t ) = r ⋅ P s ( t ) .
• nsh denotes the generated ShotNoise current with the one-sided spectral noise
density Nsh in A ⁄ Hz . The spectral density is determined by
N sh = 2q ⋅ ( i s + i d ) , (2)
if ShotNoise is switched ON.

• nth represents the ThermalNoise caused by the (usually high) photodetector’s
internal resistance. The associated one-sided spectral noise density Nth has to
be specified by the user in A ⁄ Hz .
• id denotes the PIN DarkCurrent.
The statistically independent noise currents, nsh and nth, are created with the aid of
the noise generator. The seed value for the noise generator is specified by the pa-
rameter RandomNumberSeed. If a default value of zero is chosen the used seed
value is unique in the simulation. This means that the noise sequence is uncorrelat-
ed to each other noise sequence used in the simulation.
i(t)
is nsh nth id
Figure 1. Noise equivalent diagram of a PIN-Direct-Receiver.

Multiple Bands: The input of the photodiode is processed in a similar way to the
Join Bands function of the ViOSA. All optical sampled bands are joined to build one
single sampled band. Parameterized signals are not considered in this process. If
only parametrized signals or noise bins are available (no sampled band), an warning
message occurs.
Parameterized Signals: Currently no parametrized signals are considered in the
process of building a single sampled band. This means that no information of pa-
rametrized signals is available in the electrical signal.
2JQVQFKQFG2+0
Noise Bins: Noise Bins falling within the MFB/SFB ranges are converted to Gaus-
sian white optical noise. The total optical field is then detected by taking the square
of the modulus of the total optical field at each time point.
Note that Noise Bins falling outside the SFB/MFBs are not converted to an
electrical output. This means that the frequency span of the SFB/MFB should
be sufficiently wide to cover any optical noise that will contribute significantly
to the photocurrent and its electrical noise. If in doubt, a dummy SFB can be
added to the input of the photodetector (for example a zero amplitude Laser-
CW).
Boundary Conditions: both periodic and aperiodic boundary conditions are sup-
ported.
The individual sample mode is supported.
Multiple Runs: In the first run, a unique seed is occupied if the parameter Ran-
domNumberSeed is chosen to zero. On consecutive runs, the individual random
sequence of the module using the noise generator is continued.
Restart of Simulation: If the simulation is restarted, the same seed value from the
lookup table is used for noise generation. Note that topology changes may change
the specific seed value used by a module.
Module Deactivation: Currently not available.
An warning message occurs if only noise bins or parametrized signals are available
as input signal.
References
[1] J. GOWAR: Optical Communication Systems. Second Edition, Prentice–Hall,
1993, pp. 465–488.
[2] W. REIMER: Zur Analyse und Optimierung digitaler optischer Direktempfänger.
PhD Thesis, TH Ilmenau, 1991, pp. 20–24.
%NQEM4GEQXGT[+FGCN
%NQEM4GEQXGT[+FGCN
%NQEM4GEQXGT[+FGCN 1RVKECN4GEGKXGTU
Purpose
The module determines the time delay between the incoming signal and the original
signal, which is automatically regenerated from the specified logical information at-
tached to the incoming signal without the need of a reference input. Thus, this mod-
ule acts as an ideal clock recovery.
Inputs
input = electrical signal
Outputs
output = electrical signal, which is a delayed copy of the input
Resynchronize — — enum yes ON, OFF
defines if the time delay is recalculated OFF
at each run
ChannelLabel — — string yes — —
label of the logical channel to use for
reference synthesis
ChannelIndex — — int yes — —
index of the logical channel to use for
reference synthesis; a value of −1
refers to the last
Description
The module synchronizes the incoming electrical signal with the original transmit-
ted signal. The original signal is regenerated from the specified logical information
channel attached to the physical signal. From logical information, like the digital bit
stream, pulse shape, coding type, modulation type, and bit rate, a copy of the initial-
ly sent signal is built. The time delay is calculated from the cross correlation of the
incoming electrical signal and the internally regenerated original signal. The incom-
ing signal is then shifted in time, so that the electrical output signal is a time de-
layed copy of the incoming signal.
%NQEM4GEQXGT[+FGCN
Selection of logical channel

The logical channel which is to be used to extract the received bit sequence can be
specified by parameters ChannelLabel and ChannelIndex. All other logical chan-
nels are removed from the signal. (This allows to display the bit error rate in the eye
diagram of the Scope visualizer since the logical information is unambiguous if only
one logical channel is present.)
Parameter ChannelLabel: specifies the label of the logical channel (see comment
below).
Parameter ChannelIndex: distinguishes between the data sets of different runs of
the simulation. A value of -1 selects the data block of the last simulation run.
The signal consists of one sampled electrical band.
Multiple Runs: The parameter Resynchronize specifies if the time delay is recal-
culated in each run or if the same time delay is used in consecutive runs.
Module Deactivation: The parameter Active specifies if the data are delayed in
this module or if the input signal is directly passed through to the output.
• If the normalized maximum peak of the cross correlation function is below 0.8,
a warning appears showing that there is some inherent problem in comparing
the input signal with the internally generated reference signal.
• If one of the following informations (bit stream, pulse shape, coding type or
modulation info) is missing, a fatal error occurs since the reference signal could
not be regenerated. A copy of the input data is stored in a dummy file and can
be accessed directly by the user via the module ReadFromFile. Instead of the
module ClockRecoveryIdeal, you should then use the module ClockRecoveryIde-
alRef, which allows to specify a reference signal, so that no information from
the logical information channel data is needed.
Comments
In the case that the logical information leads to confusion using sophisticated modu-
lation schemes or user defined waveforms, it is recommended to use the module
ClockRecoveryIdealRef, which extracts this information directly from the user-pro-
vided reference signal.
%NQEM4GEQXGT[+FGCN
12-
'NGEVTKECN(KNVGTU
Filter LP Bessel (Electrical) 12-3
(KNVGT.2$GUUGN
'NGEVTKECN
(KNVGT.2$GUUGN
'NGEVTKECN
(KNVGT$GUUGN.2A'N 'NGEVTKECN(KNVGTU
Purpose
The module represents an analog Bessel lowpass filter.
Inputs
input = electrical signal
Outputs
Physical Parameters
CutoffFrequency f3dB Hz real yes ]0,∞[ 0.7 *
3dB cutoff frequency of the filter BitRateDe-
fault
FilterOrder N — int yes [1,100] 3
order of the filter
DigitalFilterOrder — — int no [8,1024]a 64
odic simulation
Description
An analog Bessel filter realizes the minimal phase system (linear phase). Therefore,
preservation of wave shape of the filtered signal in the passband can be achieved.
The transfer function of the filter is described by
1 jf
T ( p ) = ---------------- with p = ----------- , (1)
Nn ( p ) f 3dB
(KNVGT.2$GUUGN
'NGEVTKECN
where f3dB is the 3dB CutoffFrequency. Nn(p) is the denominator polynomial,

which can be written for an nth (n>0) order filter recursively in the form
Bn( p)
Nn(p) = ---------------- , (2)
Bn ( 0 )
2
Bn(p) = ( 2n – 1 )B n – 1(p) + p Bn – 2(p) . (3)
The polynomials Bn(p) denote the Bessel polynomials [1]. Table 1 shows the first
4 polynomials. T(p) is normalized to the reciprocal value of the group delay. n speci-
fies the FilterOrder.
Table 1. Polynomials Bn ( p ) .
n Bn(p)
1 1+p
2 3 + 3p + p2
3 15 + 15p + 6p2 + p3
4 105 + 105p + 45p2 + 10p3 + p4
…
A(f) Φ(f)
1
2
f3dB f f3dB f
0
Figure 1. Frequency response and phase of a Bessel filter.

Currently electrical signals are represented by a single sampled band. No noisebins
or parameterized signals are supported.
(KNVGT.2$GUUGN
'NGEVTKECN
4N coeffs < N Block
function is calculated once, being re-used each time the module is executed. Other-
Module Deactivation: If the module is deactivated (Active=OFF), the input data
will simply be passed through.
References:
[1] L. WANGENHEIM: Aktive Filter in RC- und SC-Technik. Hüthig Buch Verlag
GmbH, Heidelberg, 1991.
(KNVGT.2$GUUGN
'NGEVTKECN
13-
4KPI&GUKIP
Ring Setup 13-3

Ring Initialization (Loop) 13-4
4KPI5GVWR
4KPI5GVWR
4KPI5GVWR 4KPI&GUKIP
Purpose
The module allows to design ring structures initialized with a zero signal.
Inputs
i1, i2 = data signal
(signal type: ANYTYPE)
Outputs
o1, o2 = data signal
(signal type: ANYTYPE)
Physical Parameters
Loops Number of roundtrips in the — — int [1,∞[ 1
loop
Description
The module enables the user to design loop structures. The loop structure to be built
starts at the output port and terminates at the input port of the module. A particle
released into the loop will circulate a number of Loops times through the ring.
Note that all simulation setups using this module are supposed to have their do-
main set to BDF (Boolean Dataflow). This can be achieved by placing the cursor
over the universe, typing d and pressing the BDF button in the dialog box.
The module simply passes its input signal through to the output, thus leaving sam-
pled bands or any other signal representation unchanged.
Multiple Runs: On consecutive runs, the ring is initialized with the same initial
condition in each run. In particular, the parameter Loops may not be confused with
the number of runs.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: If the simulation is reset, the
ring will be initialized with the same initial conditions before the next run.
4KPI+PKVKCNK\CVKQP
.QQR
4KPI+PKVKCNK\CVKQP
.QQR
4KPI+PKVKCNK\G 4KPI&GUKIP
Purpose
This module allows to construct loop structures which can be initialized with optical
input signals.
Inputs
input = data signal
loopIn = data signal
Outputs
output = data signal
loopOut = data signal
Physical Parameters
Loops Number of roundtrips in the — — int — [1,∞[ 1
loop
Description
The module enables the user to design loop structures. The loop structure to be built
starts at the loopOut port and terminates at the loopIn port of the module. A parti-
cle released into the loop via the input port will circulate a number of Loops times
through the ring and be released afterwards at the output port.
In contrast to the module Ring Setup, which does initialize the loop with a null sig-
nal, this module allows to initialize the loop with external data to be supplied at the
input port of the module.
Note that all simulation setups using this module are supposed to have their do-
main set to BDF (Boolean Dataflow). This can be achieved by placing the cursor
over the universe, typing d and pressing the BDF button in the dialog box.
The module simply passes its input signal through to the output, thus leaving sam-
pled bands or any other signal representation unchanged.
4KPI+PKVKCNK\CVKQP
.QQR
Multiple Runs: On consecutive runs, the ring is initialized with the same initial
condition. In particular, the parameter Loops may not be confused with the num-
ber of runs.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: If the simulation is reset, the
ring will be initialized with the same initial conditions before the next run.
4KPI+PKVKCNK\CVKQP
.QQR
14-
8KUWCNK\GTU
Optical Spectrum Analyzer 14-3

Time Domain Visualizer 14-11
RF Spectrum Analyzer 14-21
Power Meter 14-28
BER Estimation (Gaussian Assumption) 14-29
BER Estimation (Gaussian Assumption, using Logical Channel) 14-34
Counter 14-37
Visualizer XY 14-38
1RVKECN5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
8K15# 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
This module is an Optical Spectrum Analyzer (OSA).
Inputs
input (multiple) = optical signal
Options — — string no see text —
options to pass to OSA
Description
This module is an optical spectrum analyzer. It can be used to visualize all signal
representations handled by the Optical Network Simulation Layer (ONSL II).
Figure 1 shows the different signal types (sampled bands, noise bins, parametrized
signals, and modulated parametrized signals) and their visualization (cf. Signal
Representation Demos).
When used from within PTDS, the OSA has its visualizer window pop up as soon as
data become available at its input port. By default, the displayed frequency range is
automatically set to show all received data.
The following gives an overview of the features currently supported.
Zoom
To zoom into a display region of interest, use the mouse to drag a box around the de-
sired part of the plot (as depicted in Figure 2). The selected area will be zoomed (as
shown in Figure 3). To restore the view, click button Auto Set while option Autolevel
is ON.
Menus and Controls in the Window
Top Bar
File Provides access to a pull-down menu with the following entries:
Load Load data from a previously saved file on disk, e.g., for comparison with
other simulations.
Sampled Band
Parametrized
Signal
Modulated
Parametrized
Signal
Noise Bin
Figure 1. Example of an Optical Spectrum Analyzer window.

(From the Demo “Different signal representations”.)
Figure 2. Selecting an area to be zoomed in, by dragging a box with the mouse.
Save Save all available data to disk, e.g., to reuse later for comparison with
other simulations. OSA automatically appends an index number to the
specified filename for multiple runs of a simulation. To open a data file
later, use File > Load. (Alternatively, you may also give a file name as an
command line argument: “OSA path/filename”.)
Print Opens a dialog window for printing of the actual display. The generated
PostScript data may either be sent directly to the printer, or be stored on
a disk file for later processing by other tools or application programs.
Quit Select this to terminate the OSA and close the window. (Alternatively,
you may use the Exit button in the lower right corner of the OSA window,
or use the keyboard shortcut “Ctrl+d”.)
Preferences Provides access to a pull-down menu with the following entries:
Figure 3. The selected region will be displayed at a larger scale.
High Resolution Allows you to select whether the full set of data should be dis-
played. To improve speed and appearance of the screen display, by default
the OSA uses a subset of the data based on the size of the current zoom
window, as explained above. A small button indicates whether high reso-
lution is switched on or off.
MinLog Opens a dialog box that allows you to specify a threshold for the lower
limit of the vertical axis. Data below that value will not be displayed.
(This has only an effect in logarithmic display mode.)
These buttons provide an arbitrary-depth undo and redo functionality, re-
spectively. They allow you to navigate through the list of views displayed so far.
This includes both the sequence of visited data plots (for multiple runs) and the
different zoom settings you may have chosen for any single plot. However,
marker settings are not supported.
Store : ON/OFF If ON is chosen, the next result is displayed in the same window
without deleting previous graphs. On the other hand, OFF will clear the window
before each result is displayed (for multiple runs).
Avg : ON/OFF If the Join mode is enabled, this button is available and allows to ap-
ply an averaging over several simulated blocks. In continuous mode, new data
are included in the average value as soon as they become available. In single
shot mode, the prev and next buttons must be used to step through data sets.
continuous / single shotServes to enable or disable the automatic update feature.
If enabled (continuous mode), each result will be shown as soon as it becomes
available. If disabled (single shot mode), you can step through the data “manu-
ally”. In continuous mode, the prev and next buttons are disabled.
Note that this button will always display the name of the mode that will be-
come active when clicking the button, not the currently active mode.
prev Display the previous simulated block (for multiple runs).
next Display the next simulated block (for multiple runs).
Side Bar
Join : ON/OFF Converts the different signal representations into a single sampled
band before they are displayed. See Programmer’s Manual for further details of
this process.
Log : ON/OFF This button specifies whether a logarithmic scale is used for the ver-
tical axis of the plot.
Power, Power X, Power Y By selecting one of these options you can specify the po-
larization component to display. Choose Power X or Power Y to display only the
x- or y-polarization component, or choose Power to display the sum of both po-
larizations components.
Auto Set This button sets the controls of the visualizer to its default state and ad-
justs the reference, start and stop frequencies to plot all available data. When
un-pressed the start and stop frequencies can be set manually in the boxes be-
low. When pressed all settings defined by Auto Set and Bandwidth limit are lost.
Ref Specifies a reference frequency to which all frequency values are normal-
ized. Upon startup, the reference frequency is set to the middle of the
largest frequency and smallest frequency component of the received sig-
nal.
Start, Stop These fields specify start and stop frequencies relative to the refer-
ence frequency.
AutoLevel : ON/OFF Specifies whether the autolevel feature should be used for the
y-axis.
Min, Max If AutoLevel is OFF, these fields specify the minimum and maximum
level of the plot, respectively. Otherwise, these values are determined au-
tomatically.
Ref A power reference level is specified. By default, the reference level is set
to 0dBm (1mW). A value of +30dBm scales the y-axis in dBW, by dividing
the input values by 1000.
Bandwidth Limit : ON/OFF This button serves to control an optional reduced resolu-
tion bandwidth, by two applied filter types, to simulate real-world optical spec-
trum analyzers.
Gauss Controls the FWHM bandwidth of a Gaussian filter.
Rect Controls the bandwidth of a rectangular filter.
Marker By pressing this button, a separate window opens to control the markers.
See explanation below.
Exit This button exits the visualizer. Press “Ctrl+d” as a keyboard shortcut to
exit the visualizer. Equivalent to File > Quit.
Marker Panel
The marker window (see Figure 4) allows you to insert and control the positions of
two markers. If the marker window is enabled, the positions of the specified mark-
ers (M1 and/or M2) are displayed below the graph (see Figure 5).
Figure 4. Marker panel.
Figure 5. Display of marker positions.

Current plot If multiple plots are shown in the OSA window, this field allows you to
select the active plot for the markers.
Marker 1 / Marker 2 Select which of the markers is affected by the movement com-
mand buttons (<, >, <<, >>) and the Peak Search button. Alternatively, you may
specify a position directly by entering a frequency value in the corresponding
field.
Clear Clears both markers from the display.
Set If more than one signal is displayed in one visualizer window, this field allows
you to specify the active data set for the markers.
Sync If selected, markers of separate diagrams (see option -s) are tracked to each
other and can be controlled by pressing the <, >, <<, and >> buttons.
Track If selected, both markers in one diagram are tracked to each other and can be
controlled by pressing the <, >, <<, and >> buttons.
Type of data Allows you to select specific data types as targets for the <, >, <<, and
>> buttons. For details see below.
< and > These buttons move the selected marker to the left and right, respectively.
The marker will jump to specific locations, depending on the types of data
present in the display window of the OSA and on the data type(s) selected as
targets. (By default, the marker will move by samples.) For details see below.
<< and >> These buttons move the selected marker to the left and right, respec-
tively. The marker jumps in relatively large equidistant skips; however, if spe-
cific data types have been selected as targets, huge gaps in the data will be
crossed in one skip. For details see below.
Peak Search Sets the active marker to a peak in the spectrum. Pressing this button
repeatedly scans all peaks of the signal.
Dismiss Closes the marker panel and removes the marker information from the
main OSA visualizer window.
Moving the markers
Specifying marker positions by values: The markers may be put to specific fre-
quencies by entering appropriate values in the corresponding fields of the marker
panel.
Selective navigation: By default, all data types are used when determining the
possible targets for the <, >, <<, and >> operations. To restrict these operations to a
specific data type, select the desired ONSL signal type from the corresponding com-
bo-box at the lower right corner on the marker panel. Thereafter the forward (>, >>)
and backward (<, <<) controls will move the marker only on samples of the appropri-
ate type.
Parametrized Signals: The marker stops at the center frequency of the signal (<, >,
<<, >>).
Modulated Parametrized Signals: The marker stops at the minimum, center, and
maximum frequencies of the signal (<, >) or only at the minimum (>>) or maxi-
mum (<<), respectively.
Sampled Bands: The marker stops at every data point displayed (<, >) or jumps in
relatively large equidistant skips within contiguous arrays of data (<<, >>).
Gaps in the data are crossed immediately.
Noise Bins: The marker stops at the minimum, center, and maximum frequencies
of the noise bin (<, >) or only at the center frequency (<<, >>).
Selective navigation is useful for moving the marker only on specific signal types
and ignoring the others.
Dragging with the mouse: A marker may also be positioned by dragging it with the
mouse (see Figure 6). This operation is equivalent to placing a marker by specifying
a new value in the corresponding field on the marker panel.
Figure 6. Dragging a marker with the mouse.

Options
With the parameter Options, the behavior of the visualizer module can be changed
in several ways. The following options are available:
-t "This is the title" Can be used to specify a title for the plot.
-x "xlabel" Can be used to set a custom label for the abscissa instead of the de-
fault.
-y "ylabel" Can be used to set a custom label for the ordinate instead of the de-
fault.
-1 dataset1 -2 dataset2 -3 dataset3 ... Can be used to specify titles for
the input signals.
-geom 800x600+1+100 Allows to specify the size and position of the visualizer
window.
Multiple Runs: Every data block at the input can be accessed by stepping forward
(backward) with the next (prev) button or is automatically displayed if the continu-
ous mode is selected.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: A new visualizer will be start-
ed.
Module Deactivation: If the module is deactivated (Active = OFF), no visualizer
window pops up.
Comments
Display resolution
In order to reduce the amount of data being displayed on the screen, thus accelerat-
ing the visual appearance of the plot, by default only a selected subset of the data of
sampled bands is plotted. This data reduction is achieved by subdividing the signal
into segments of n samples and displaying the minimum and maximum values on
each segment. The length n of the segments is computed at runtime according to the
amount of visible data. Thus, the resolution will increase when zooming into the
data plot (see Figure 3). Note that due to the chosen data reduction strategy, low
resolution plots will appear very similar to high resolution ones.
Select Preferences > High Resolution to suppress this automatic data reduction.
Command Line / Drag & Drop
The OSA visualizer can be used as a stand-alone program.
In a Unix environment it is started by typing “OSA filename” at the command
prompt, where filename specifies the data file to be analyzed.
In a windows environment you may drag & drop a data file onto the OSA.bat icon
in directory <PTDS install directory>/bin. You can create a shortcut to the
visualizer on the desktop by dragging the icon with the right mouse button to the
desktop and choosing create shortcut from the pop-up menu.
This can be utilized to view previously saved data sets (e.g., those written by means
of the WriteToFile module).
6KOG&QOCKP8KUWCNK\GT
8K5EQRG 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
This module displays electrical and optical signal waveforms (in the time domain).
Input
input (multiple)= input signal
(signal type: Optical Blocks, Optical Samples, Electrical Blocks, Elec-
trical Samples)
Options — — strin no see text —
options to pass to the visualizer g
back-end
Epsilon — — real no — 1e-20
value below which signals are consid-
ered as zero
Description
The ViScope module acts as a time domain visualizer for electrical amplitude and
optical power signals. By setting markers it allows to measure different properties
of the signal (see Handling).
Multiple channels (of the same type) can be fed into this module. The different input
data sets are then plotted in different colors. Note: If multiple inputs are connected
to the visualizer, all inputs must be of the same data type; either Electrical Blocks
or Optical Blocks.
When used from within PTDS, the ViScope module has its visualizer window pop up
as soon as data become available at its input port. By default, the displayed frequen-
cy range is automatically set to show all received data.
Figure 1 shows a typical output of an electrical amplitude signal after detection
with a PIN diode.
If optical signals are analyzed, you can interactively determine if the total power or
the powers in the x- or y-polarization are displayed (see Figure 2). It is also possible
to monitor the chirp of the signal (see Figure 3).
The time-domain visualizer also allows you to show and analyze eye-diagrams of the
received signals (see Figure 6). An eye-diagram will be displayed automatically, if
the simulator could determine the bit rate of the signal; otherwise the user will be
Figure 1. Example of a Scope Analyzer window displaying an electrical signal.
asked to specify the number of samples per bit which is equal to the ratio of sample
rate to bit rate.
Handling
As soon as the first data block is available at the input port, the interactive visualiz-
er is started. Figure 1 shows a typical output after detection with a PIN diode.
By pressing the Eye button it is possible to display the eye diagrams of all input
channels (see Figure 6). The marker panel allows you to set two independent mark-
ers.
If optical signals are analyzed, you can interactively determine if the total power or
the powers in the x- or y-polarization are displayed. It is also possible to monitor the
chirp of the signal.
• If Power is selected, the sum of both polarizations will be shown (see Figure 2).
• If PowerX or PowerY are selected, an additional check-box becomes available. By
selecting this Chirp button, the plot window is divided in two parts (see
Figure 3). In the lower part a plot of the time-resolved frequency deviation from
the centre of the modeled band will be displayed.
Every sample block will be displayed as soon as it becomes available. By default, the
visualizer is started in single shot mode. No automatic update of the curves is pro-
vided in this mode. The next simulation result can be accessed by pressing the next
button. The previously plotted results can be shown by pressing the prev button.
Figure 2. Example of a Scope Analyzer window displaying an optical signal.
Figure 3. Displaying the chirp of an optical signal.
By pressing the continuous button at the top of the plot window, the automatic up-
date is enabled. The plot window is updated each time a new data block is input to
the visualizer.
Zoom
shown in Figure 5). To rescale the view to the initial view press the right mouse but-
ton.

Top Bar
other simulations.
other simulations. Scope automatically appends an index number to the
later, use File > Load.
Quit Select this to terminate the Scope and close the window. (Alternatively,
you may use the Exit button in the lower right corner of the Scope window,
High Resolution Allows to select whether the full set of data should be dis-
the Scope Analyzer uses a subset of the data based on the size of the cur-
rent zoom window, as explained above. A small button indicates whether
high resolution is switched on or off.
Samples per bit Opens a dialog box that allows you to specify the number of
samples per bit to be used for the eye-diagram.
continuous / single shot Serves to enable or disable the automatic update feature.
Side Bar
Eye : ON/OFF This button is only functional/displayed if logical information is
present in the data signal(s) received at the input port of the visualizer module;
it allows you to control whether an eye diagram window is displayed. For de-
tails see below.
Power, Power X, Power Y (These buttons will only be present, if an optical signal is
displayed.) By selecting one of these options you can specify the polarization
component to display. Choose Power X or Power Y to display only the x- or y-po-
larization component, or choose Power to display the sum of both polarizations
components. If PowerX or PowerY are selected, an additional check-box becomes
available. By pressing this Chirp button, the plot window is divided in two
parts. In the lower part a plot of the time-resolved frequency deviation from the
centre of the modeled band will be displayed.
Chirp (This button will only be present, if an optical signal is displayed, and if ei-
ther Power X or Power Y have been chosen.) See explanation above.
Eye Diagram
To display an eye diagram an button (Eye : ON/OFF) is dis-

played at the right of the window.
If this button is activated, a visualizer window appears,
showing the eye-diagrams of all input channels. If more
than one signal was connected to the multi-port input, the
eye-diagrams of the signals are plotted separately.
Figure 6. Eye diagram window.
Top Bar
Dismiss Select this to terminate the eye diagram display and close the win-
dow. (Alternatively, you may use the Dismiss button in the lower right
corner of the eye diagram window, or use the keyboard shortcut “Ctrl+d”.
Switching the Eye : OFF button in the main window has the same effect.)
the OSA uses a subset of the data based on the size of the current zoom
Samples per bit Opens a dialog box that allows you to specify the number of
samples per bit to be used for the eye-diagram.
Side Bar
Dismiss This button exits the eye-diagram window. Press “Ctrl+d” as a key-
board shortcut to terminate. Equivalent to File > Dismiss.
Marker Panel
By pressing the Marker button in the time domain plot or in the eye-visualizing
mode, the marker control panel opens.
Figure 7. Marker panel.

Current plot With this selection box, the actual plot that the markers are applied to
is selected. This allows you to switch between different plots, which is especial-
ly useful with the chirp display and multiple eye diagrams.
Set If more than one signal is displayed in one plot (e.g., Figure 1), the active data
set for the markers can be selected with this selection box. In order to enable
measurements between different data sets, the active data set is controllable
for each of the markers independently.
mand buttons (<, >, <<, >>). Alternatively, you may specify a frequency value di-
rectly by entering a value in the corresponding field.
< and > These buttons move the selected marker to the left and right, respectively.
tively. The marker jumps in relatively large equidistant skips; however, huge
gaps in the data will be crossed in one skip.
main scope visualizer window or eye diagram window, respectively.
BER Calculation
If the marker panel is opened with an eye diagram displayed and there is only one
logical channel present in the signal1, it is possible to display the BER depending on
the current marker positions:
Calculate BER By selecting this option, the Q value and the BER value at the mark-
er position are calculated and shown below the plot.
Figure 8. BER estimation, mean values between the positions of the markers.
If both markers are used, the mean Q value and the mean BER in the range be-
tween the marker positions are calculated. The BER is calculated using a
Gauss approximation (see the Gaussian BER Estimation module).
1. Module ClockRecoveryIdeal in folder Optical Receivers can be used to remove all logical channels from
a signal except the one specified by the user and used for clock recovery.
In addition, a value for the eye opening at the position of the first marker is cal-
culated according to 10 log ( µ 1 – 3 σ 1 – µ0 + 3 σ 0 ) , where µi and σi are the mean
value and the standard deviation for marks and spaces, respectively.
Moving the markers
Specifying marker positions by values: The markers may be put to specific times
by entering appropriate values in the corresponding fields of the marker panel.
Incremental navigation: The forward (>, >>) and backward (<, <<) controls will
move the marker stepwise through the data set.

Options
fault.
fault.
the input signals.
-e Specifies that the visualizer should start in eye diagram mode.
window.

ed.
window pops up.
If the signal at the input of the visualizer does not contain any sampled signals, an
error message will be displayed:
Only parametrized signals or noisebins detected on input.
Display of parametrized signals or noisebins in time domain
not yet supported.
Parametrized signals and noise bins are not yet supported for visualization in the
time domain.
Comments
The Scope visualizer can be used as a stand-alone program.
In a Unix environment it is started by typing “Scope filename” at the command
prompt, where filename specifies a data file to be analyzed which was previously
saved by the Scope visualizer.
In a windows environment you may drag & drop a data file onto the Scope.bat
icon in directory <PTDS install directory>/bin. You can create a shortcut to
the visualizer on the desktop by dragging the icon with the right mouse button to
the desktop and choosing create shortcut from the pop-up menu.
Note: The Scope can not read the data files produced by the Write To File module.
Display resolution
data plot (see Figure 5).
Select Preferences > High Resolution to suppress this automatic data reduction. Note
that due to the chosen data reduction strategy, low resolution plots will appear very
similar to high resolution ones.
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
8K4(5# 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
This module is an Electrical Spectrum Analyzer (Radio Frequency Spectrum Ana-
lyzer).
Inputs
input (multiple) = electrical signal
Options — — string no see text -t title
options to pass to RFSA
Description
This module is a radio frequency spectrum analyzer. It can be used to visualize the
one-sided spectrum of an electrical signal. Figure 1 shows the visualization of the
characterization of laser relative intensity noise (RIN) using a rate equations model
(cf. DemoLaser5).
When used from within PTDS, the RFSA has its visualizer window pop up as soon
as data become available at its input port. By default, the displayed frequency range
is automatically set to show all received data.
Zoom
shown in Figure 3). To restore the view, click button Auto Set while option Autolevel
is ON.

Top Bar
other simulations.
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
Figure 1. Example of a RF spectrum analyzer window.
other simulations. RFSA automatically appends an index number to the
later, use File > Load. (Alternatively, you may also give a file name as an
command line argument: “RFSA path/filename”.)
PostScript data may either be sent directly to the printer specified in the
corresponding text entry field, or be stored on a disk file for later process-
ing by other tools or application programs.
Quit Select this to terminate the RFSA and close the window. (Alternatively,
you may use the Exit button in the lower right corner of the RFSA window,
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
the RFSA uses a subset of the data based on the size of the current zoom
MinLog Opens a dialog box that allows to specify a threshold for the lower lim-
it of the vertical axis. Data below that value will not be displayed. (This
has only an effect in logarithmic display mode.)
Store : ON/OFF If ON is chosen, the next result is displayed in the same window
without deleting previous graphs. On the other hand, OFF will clear the window
before each result is displayed (for multiple runs).
Avg : ON/OFF If the Join mode is enabled, this button is available and allows to ap-
ply an averaging over several simulated blocks. In continuous mode, new data
are included in the average value as soon as they become available. In single
shot mode, the prev and next buttons must be used to step through data sets.
continuous / single shotServes to enable or disable the automatic update feature.
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
Side Bar
Log : ON/OFF This button specifies whether a logarithmic scale is used for the ver-
tical axis of the plot.
Auto Set This button sets the controls of the visualizer to its default state and ad-
justs the start and stop frequencies to plot all available data. All settings de-
fined by Auto Set and Bandwidth limit are lost.
Start, Stop These fields specify start and stop frequencies.
AutoLevel : ON/OFF Specifies whether the autolevel feature should be used.
Min, Max If AutoLevel is OFF, these fields specify the minimum and maximum
level of the plot, respectively. Otherwise, these values are determined au-
tomatically.
Ref A power reference level is specified. By default, the reference level is set
to 0dBm (1mW).
Bandwidth Limit : ON/OFF This button serves to control an optional reduced resolu-
tion bandwidth, by two applied filter types, to simulate real-world electrical
spectrum analyzers.
Gauss Controls the FWHM bandwidth of a Gaussian filter.
Rect Controls the bandwidth of a rectangular filter.
Marker Panel
The marker window (see Figure 4) allows to insert and control the positions of two
markers. If a marker is enabled, the position of the specified markers (M1 and/or
M2) are displayed below the graph (see Figure 5).
Current plot If multiple plots are shown in the RFSA window, this field allows you
to select the active plot for the markers.
mand buttons (<, >, <<, >>) and the Peak Search button. Alternatively, you may
specify a position directly by entering a frequency value in the corresponding
field.
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
Figure 4. Marker panel
Figure 5. Display of marker positions.

Set If more than one signal is displayed in one visualizer window, this field allows
you to specify the active data set for the markers.
< and > These buttons move the selected marker by sample to the left and right,
respectively.
tively. The marker jumps in relatively large equidistant skips; however, huge
gaps in the data will be crossed in one skip.
Peak Search Sets the active marker to a peak in the spectrum. Pressing this button
repeatedly scans all peaks of the signal.
main RFSA visualizer window.
Moving the markers
Specifying marker positions by values: The markers may be put to specific fre-
quencies by entering appropriate values in the corresponding fields of the marker
panel.
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
Incremental navigation: The forward (>, >>) and backward (<, <<) controls will
move the marker stepwise through the data set.

Options
fault.
fault.
the input signals.
window.
ed.
window pops up.
Comments
The RFSA visualizer can be used as a stand-alone program.
4(5RGEVTWO#PCN[\GT
In a Unix environment it is started by typing “RFSA filename” at the command

prompt, where filename specifies the electrical data file to be analyzed (e.g., those
written by means of the WriteToFile module). This can be utilized to view previously
saved data sets .
In a windows environment you may drag & drop a data file onto the RFSA.bat icon
in directory <PTDS install directory>/bin. You can create a shortcut to the
visualizer on the desktop by dragging the icon with the right mouse button to the
desktop and choosing create shortcut from the pop-up menu.
Display resolution
data plot.
Select Preferences > High Resolution to suppress this automatic data reduction. Note
that due to the chosen data reduction algorithm, low resolution plots will appear
very similar to high resolution ones.
2QYGT/GVGT
2QYGT/GVGT
2QYGTOGVGT 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
The module is a power meter and may be used for power calculations.
Input
Output
output = optical power
(signal type: Float)
Parameters
MeasMode defines whether the total — — enum — TOTAL TOTAL
power over all signals is calculated or PIN
the power incident on a photodiode is
measured
Description
The module measures the optical power.
The parameter MeasMode specifies how the power is measured:
TOTAL: This calculates the total optical power by summing the powers, calculated
independently, of all of the Sampled Signals, Noise Bins, and Parameterized Sig-
nals. This does not account for optical mixing between the signals, that could cause
an increase or reduction of the power over the sum of the powers in the individual
signal formats.
PIN: This calculates the power like in a photodiode e.g. a PIN or APD. First a single
optical field is created by joining all sampled bands into a Single Band, and adding
the Gaussian noise equivalent of the Noise Bins falling within the bandwidth of the
new single sampled band. No noise bins outside the single band and no parame-
trized signals are considered. The total average optical power is then calculated for
this joint band. In this case, there may be a reduction in the power by coherent mix-
ing. Parameterized channels are not considered in this case.
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
)CWUUKCP#UUWORVKQP
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
)CWUUKCP#UUWORVKQP
$'4 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
The module evaluates the system performance by estimating the bit error rate
(BER) using a Gaussian approximation. The influence of intersymbol interferences
(ISI) can also be taken into account.
The module uses the bit sequence from input port bits to determine the marks and
spaces in the received signal.
Inputs
input = Input of electrical signal.
bits = Bit sequence originally sent.
(signal type: int)
Outputs
ber = Average BER over sampled time slot.
(signal type: float)
q = Q-value over sampled time slot.
Physical Parameters
EstimationMethod Defines — — enum no GAUSS, GAUSS
the method of BER estimation GAUSS_ISI
SampleType Defines the — — enum no OPTIMUM, OPTIMUM
choice of the sampling instant. RELATIVE
SampleTime The normal- — — real no [0,1[ 0.5
ized sampling instant relative
to the bit frame.
SampleRange The normal- — — real no [0,1[ 0
ized sampling range relative to
the bit frame.
ThresholdType Defines the — — enum no OPTIMUM, OPTIMUM
method of threshold calcula- RELATIVE,
tion. ABSOLUTE
Threshold Threshold value. D — real no — 1.0e-3
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
)CWUUKCP#UUWORVKQP
StartVisualizer Defines if — — enum no NO, NO
the visualizer is started up YES
(YES) or not (NO).
Title Main title. — — string no — —
Description
At the end of a simulation run the Bit Error Rate (BER) as well as the Q-value is
calculated with respect to the given decision threshold D (Threshold). These values
are passed to the output ports ber and q.
The estimation method can be set by parameter EstimationMethod. Currently
only two methods are available: Gaussian BER estimation and Gauss ISI estima-
tion. Other methods will be supported soon. Please call our support line for detailed
information (support@bned.com).
Description of ApproximationType GAUSS
If parameter SampleType is set to OPTIMUM a sample instant with minimum BER
value will be chosen. If SampleType is set to RELATIVE the sampling instant can
be specified by parameter SampleTime relative to the bit frame. If parameter
SampleRange is greater than zero mean BER and Q-values will me computed over
the specified range. The range is also specified relative to the bit frame.
If the parameter StartVisualizer is set to YES, the Q-value as well as the BER vs.
the given sampling time and the BER vs the threshold are plotted.
The parameter ThresholdType is used to determine the type of threshold calcula-
tion. ThresholdType can be set to:
• ABSOLUTE The BER is calculated using the absolute threshold value deter-
mined by parameter Threshold.
• RELATIVE The relative threshold value can be specified in percents with re-
spect to the values of mean value for the marks (µ1) and spaces (µ0). For exam-
ple, Threshold 70 corresponds to an absolute threshold value of
µ0 +0.7×(µ1−µ0).
• OPTIMUM The optimum value of the decision threshold minimizing the BER is
calculated according to
 ( D – µ ) 2  ( D – µ ) 2
------ exp – ------------------------ = ------ exp  – ------------------------
1  0  1 1 
. (1)
σ0  2  σ1  2 
 2σ 0   2σ 1 
At the end of a simulation run the BER is estimated for the determined decision
threshold D using a Gaussian approximation
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
)CWUUKCP#UUWORVKQP
n1 n0
BER ( D ) = ------------------------ BER 1 ( D ) + ------------------------ BER 0 ( D )
( n0 + n1 ) ( n0 + n1)
(2)
n1  µ1 – D  n0  µ0 – D 
= ---------------------------- erfc  -------------------- + ---------------------------- erfc  -------------------- ,
2 ( n0 + n1 )  2σ 1  2 ( n 0 + n 1 )  2σ 0 
where D is the decision threshold, n1 and n0 are the numbers of marks and
spaces, respectively, and erfc(x) denotes the complementary error function giv-
en by
2 ∞ –y 2
erfc ( x ) = ------- ∫ e dy . (3)
π x
The Q-factor is calculated according to [1]

µ1 – µ0
Q = --------------------- , (4)
σ1 + σ0
where µ1, µ0 are the mean values for the marks and spaces, respectively and σ1,
σ0 are the standard deviations of the marks and spaces, respectively.
Description of ApproximationType GAUSS_ISI
Most numerical models investigate a short bit stream in order to avoid excessive
computational time. With a few bits it is essential to make some assumptions about
the noise distribution. A BER estimation assuming a Gaussian noise distribution on
both the one and zero levels becomes unreliable in the presence of excess intersym-
bol interference. The inconsistency arises due to the assumption that the eye con-
sists of only two Gaussian distributions. When ISI is present, this assumption is no
longer valid and leads generally to overestimates of standard deviations and conse-
quently poor BER values.
The BER is estimated in a way similar to that of the ApproximationType GAUSS,
except taking ISI into account. The technique used in this module is described in [1],
with documentation following this publication. There are many processes which
cause data patterning to arise on the output eye of a system, e.g., nonlinearity, dis-
persion, filtering. For NRZ data, to a first approximation, the patterning on each bit
is dependent on the bit preceding it and the one following it. For example an isolat-
ed “1” bit will be affected by a low-pass filter differently from a “1” bit embedded in a
string of “1” bits. Using this fact, it is possible to relate each bit to one of eight
unique patterns. In practice there are four patterns associated with each coding lev-
el: 010, 110, 011, 010 for marks and 101, 001, 100, 000 for spaces. For example, in
the case of the logical “1”s these represent an isolated “1” bit, a “1” bit embedded
within a string of “1” bits, a “1” bit at the beginning and a “1” bit at the end of a
string of “1” bits. The eight different patterns can be represented as eight separate
noise distributions. If the bits in the sequence are sorted by pattern, the mean and
the standard deviation of each pattern can be calculated. Each of these distributions
gives the probability of error from that particular pattern; thus the assumption that
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
)CWUUKCP#UUWORVKQP
the noise is Gaussian is maintained. The probability of error in dependence on the

decision level D can be calculated for each pattern p according to
 µp – D 
BER p ( D ) = erfc  -------------------- . (5)
 2σ p 
If there is only one occurrence of any pattern, the standard deviation is zero and
therefore the probability of error can not be calculated. It is worthwhile noting that
given a pseudo-random bit sequence of reasonable length (> 64bits), the probability
of a single occurrence of any pattern is small. The total BER is found by adding the
contributions of the eight patterns, weighted to represent the frequency of each pat-
tern within the original bit sequence,
8
np
BER ( D ) = ∑ ------ BERp ( D ) ,
n’
(6)
p=1
where np is the number of occurrences of pattern p, and n′=∑np provided that np >1.
The decision value can be chosen to ABSOLUTE, RELATIVE and OPTIMUM (see Ap-
proximationType GAUSS). If it is set to OPTIMUM, the minimum BER value is
found by a binary chopping method to obtain the optimum decision level.
Generating Plots
If parameter StartVisualizer is set to YES, the following plots will be generated:
• BER Gauss vs. threshold
• BER ISI vs. threshold
• BER vs. sample time
• Q-factor vs. sample time
• eye opening vs. sample time
Creating BER curves
Plots of BER values versus various parameters, e.g. attenuation or receiver filter
bandwidth, can be created by using the sweep functionality of PTDS or by writing
Tcl/Tk scripts. See the VPI Ptolemy User’s Manual, chapter Optimizing Performance
for details. An example is given in the Optimization Demos 1 and 2.
Multiple Runs: No reinitialization is performed.
Restart of Simulation or Reset during Simulation: Reinitialization is performed.
Reset during Simulation: Reinitialization is performed.
Module Deactivation: Not supported.
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
)CWUUKCP#UUWORVKQP
References
[1] G.P. AGRAWAL: Fiber-Optic Communication Systems. John Wiley & Sons, 1992,
pp. 162–165.
[2] N.S. BERGANO, F.W. KERFOOT, & C.R. DAVIDSON: Margin Measurements in Op-
tical Amplifier Systems. IEEE Photonics Technology Letters, Vol. 5, No. 3, 1993,
pp. 304–306.
[3] C.J. ANDERSON & J.A. LYLE: Technique for evaluating system performance us-
ing Q in numerical simulations exhibiting intersymbol interference. Electronics
Letters, Vol. 30, No. 1, 1994, pp. 71–72.
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
)CWUUKCP#UUWORVKQPWUKPI.QIKECN%JCPPGN
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
$'4A0Q4GH 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
The module evaluates the system performance by estimating the bit error rate
(BER) using a Gaussian approximation. The influence of intersymbol interferences
(ISI) can also be taken into account.
The module uses the bit sequence contained in a specified logical channel to esti-
mate the bit error rate.
Inputs
input = Input of electrical signal.
Outputs
ber = Average BER over sampled time slot.
q = Q-value over sampled time slot.
Physical Parameters
EstimationMethod Defines — — enum no GAUSS, GAUSS
the method of BER estimation. GAUSS_ISI
SampleType Defines the — — enum no OPTIMUM, OPTIMUM
method of choosing the sam- RELATIVE
pling instant.
SampleTime Sampling — — real no [0,1[a 0.5
instant normalized to bit
frame.
SampleRange Sampling — — real no [0,2[a 0
range normalized to bit frame.
ThresholdType Defines the — — enum no OPTIMUM, OPTIMUM
method of threshold calcula- RELATIVE,
tion. ABSOLUTE
Threshold Threshold value. — — real no — 1.0e-3
StartVisualizer Defines if — — enum no NO,YES NO
the visualizer is started up
(YES) or not (NO).
Title Main title. — — string no — —
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
ChannelLabel The label of — — string no — —
the logical channel to use for
reference synthesis.
ChannelIndex The index of — — int no — -1
the logical channel to use for
reference synthesis. A value of
-1 refers to the last.
Description
For a complete description of the estimation methods used by this module refer to
the description of module BER Estimation (Gaussian Assumption) on page 14-29.
Selection of logical channel
The logical channel which is to be used to extract the received bit sequence can be
specified by parameters ChannelLabel and ChannelIndex.
Parameter ChannelLabel: specifies the label of the logical channel (see comment
below).
Parameter ChannelIndex: distinguishes between the data sets of different runs of
the simulation. A value of -1 selects the data block of the last simulation run.
Comment
To simplify the selection of the received bit sequence, use parameter ChannelLa-
bel of the transmitter module to set the label of the logical channel (Figure 1). The
receiver module receives the logical channels of all transmitter modules in the sche-
matic. To select the bit sequence of a specific transmitter for BER estimation, set
the parameter of the BER module to the same value as the parameter of the trans-
mitter module.
Note: If the signal is read from file you need to specify an additional prefix to the
channel label which is specified in the ReadFromFile module by parameter Chan-
nelPrefix.
$'4'UVKOCVKQP
Tx
ChannelLabel = BER
Tx + Filter
Channel2 Estimator
Tx ChannelLabel =
Channel2
Tx
name four logical channels select

logical channel are transmitted logical channel
Figure 1. Usage of parameter ChannelLabel to name and select logical channels.
%QWPVGT
%QWPVGT
%QWPVGT 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
The module is an up or down counter and can be used to show the progress in a loop
setup by counting the number of roundtrips.
The counter value is displayed in the TCL-STARS tabsheet of the Control Panel of the
Simulation Manager window.
Input
input = arbitrary signal, either electrical or optical
(signal type: arbitrary)
Output
output = unchanged copy of the input signal
(signal type: same as input signal)
Parameters
Identifier description of counted — — string no — Control
parameter
Step step size of counter — — real no ]-∞,∞[ 1.0
StartValue start value for counter — — real no ]-∞,∞[ 0.0
General Description
The module works as an up or down counter, depending on the sign of the parame-
ter Step. Each time the module is executed, the parameter Identifier is increased
(or decreased) by the value of Step. The start value of Identifier is specified by the
parameter StartValue. The input signal of arbitrary type is copied to the output
without any changes.
Since the output signal is a copy of the input signal without any changes there is no
special behavior for multiple bands, parametrized signals and noise bins.
8KUWCNK\GT:;
8KUWCNK\GT:;
8K:; 8KUWCNK\GTU
Purpose
This module displays input data in an X/Y plot.
Inputs
inputX = Input of x-axis of data to plot.
inputY (multiple) = Input of y-axis of data to plot.
Options — — string no see text -t title
options to pass to Visual module -geom
800x600
LogX — — enum no ON, OFF
defines if the X-input should be con- OFF
verted to dBm
MinLog — — real no — -200
define the lower border, if logarithmic
X-axis is enabled
Description
This Module acts as an universal X/Y plot visualizer and is mostly used for display-
ing the results of sweep simulations. Figure 1 shows the visualization of the depen-
dence of output and input power of an SOA frequency converter (cf. DemoOA3).
Its inputX port accepts particles of datatype float, representing abscissa values com-
mon to all the float particles received by the inputY multi-port. If the parameter
LogX is set to ON, the X axis is displayed in dBm scale.
When used from within PTDS, the ViXY has its visualizer window pop up as soon as
data become available at its input ports. By default, the displayed ranges of the ab-
scissa and ordinate are automatically adjusted to show all received data.
However, this module is also available as a stand-alone application to be launched
from the command prompt (“Visual filename”). This can be utilized to view pre-
viously saved data sets (e.g., those written by means of the File > Save command).
8KUWCNK\GT:;
Figure 1. Example of an X/Y plot window.
Zoom
By dragging a box with the mouse around a signal part of interest (as depicted in
Figure 2), this part will be zoomed (as shown in Figure 3).

Top Bar
other simulations.
8KUWCNK\GT:;
other simulations. ViXY automatically appends an index number to the
later, start Visual (type “Visual” at the command prompt) and use
File > Load. (Alternatively, you may also give a file name as an command
line argument: “Visual path/filename”.)
PostScript data may either be sent directly to the printer specified in the
corresponding text entry field, or be stored on a disk file for later process-
ing by other tools or application programs.
Quit Select this to terminate the ViXY and close the window. (Alternatively,
use the keyboard shortcut “Ctrl+d”.)
different zoom settings you may have chosen for any single plot.
Options
The appearance of the post processing visualizer can be modified by several options:
8KUWCNK\GT:;
fault.
fault.
the input signals.
-log10y Plot ordinate using a 10−1 , 10−2 scale. This is useful for displaying BER
plots.
-logy Plot ordinate using a logarithmic scale.
window.
8KUWCNK\GT:;
15-
105.5KIPCN%QPXGTUKQP
Resample Absolute 15-3

Converter Block To Sample 15-5
Converter Sample To Block 15-6
4GUCORNG#DUQNWVG
4GUCORNG#DUQNWVG
4GUCORNG#DUQNWVG 105.5KIPCN%QPXGTUKQP
Purpose
The module resamples the input signal to a given bandwidth.
Inputs
input = electrical/optical signal
(signal type: Optical Blocks, Electrical Blocks)
Outputs
output = electrical/optical signal
Physical Parameters
CenterFrequency fc Hz real no ]0,∞[ 193.1e12
center frequency of the band to resam-
ple (will be ignored for electrical sig-
nals)
Bandwidth — Hz real no ]0,∞[ 160.0e9
total bandwidth
Description
The module is used to confine the bandwidth of an input signal to a user defined
bandwidth and/or to shift it to a different center frequency.
Multiple Bands: Multiple input sampled bands lying within the spectral range de-
fined by parameters Bandwidth and CenterFrequency, respectively are joined to
a single band first. Input bands lying outside this range are discarded. The resulting
band is resampled to fit into the bandwidth, with the constraint that the resulting
sample array length must be a power of two. If no band is left within the spectral
range specified, a new band with appropriate bandwidth will be generated.
Parameterized Signals: Parameterized signals are not affected by this module.
4GUCORNG#DUQNWVG
Noise Bins: If the global parameter InBandNoise is ON, and the frequency range
is upsampled, noise bins are incorporated into the sampled band after it has been
adjusted to the spectral range specified.
Interactions between differently represented signals: No such interaction is consid-
ered.
Module Deactivation: If parameter Active is OFF, the optical input signals will
simply be passed through the module without any changes.
%QPXGTVGT$NQEM6Q5CORNG
%QPXGTVGT$NQEM6Q5CORNG
$NQEM6Q5CORNG 105.5KIPCN%QPXGTUKQP
Purpose
Module to convert ONSL signals in Block Mode into Sample Mode. This module acts
as interface between simulations in Sample Mode and Block Mode (see Component
Designer User’s Manual).
Inputs
inputs = optical/electrical signal.
Outputs
output = optical/electrical signal.
(signal type: Optical Samples, Electrical Samples)
General Description
The sample rate of the Sample Mode output signal is determined by the global sim-
ulation parameter SampleModeBandwidth and the center frequency of the band
by parameter SampleModeCenterFrequency.
Logical Information
The logical information channels which are attached to the input signal are stored
in the global list.
Multiple Bands: Multiple bands will be joined and limited to the bandwidth of
SampleModeBandwidth with the center frequency SampleModeCenterFre-
quency.
Parameterized Signals: Parameterized signals will be dropped.
Noise Bins: Noise bins will be included in the sampled joined band. Noise bins out-
side the sampled band will be dropped.
%QPXGTVGT5CORNG6Q$NQEM
%QPXGTVGT5CORNG6Q$NQEM
5CORNG6Q$NQEM 105.5KIPCN%QPXGTUKQP
Purpose
Module to convert ONSL signals from sample mode into block mode. This modules
acts as interface between simulations in Sample Mode and Block Mode (see Compo-
nent Designer User’s Manual).
Inputs
inputs = optical/electrical signal.
(signal type: Optical Samples, Electrical Samples)
Outputs
output = optical/electrical signal.
General Description
The sample rate of the signal is determined by the global simulation parameter
SampleModeBandwidth.
Logical Information
Logical information channels which are stored in the global list are attached to the
output signal. Only channels which have been created by modules which are con-
neced to this module are considered.

Photonic Modules

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Photonic Modules

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

2*1610+%64#05/+55+10&'5+)057+6' .

1474 Sacramento St., #402 Helmholtzstr. 2–9

Photonics House www.virtualphotonics.com

support@virtualphotonics.com Technical support, license key requests

Copyright 1999, VPI. All Rights Reserved.

PRBS Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Pulse Sechant (Optical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PulseSechOpt . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Laser CW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LaserCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Modulator Mach-Zehnder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ModulatorMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

WDM MUX N-1 Ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WDM_MUX_N_1_Ideal . . . . 5-3

Nonlinear Dispersive Fiber (NLS) . . . . . . . . . . . FiberNLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Ideal Amplifier with Wavelength

Filter FBG Bidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterFBG_Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6

Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3

Photodiode PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotodiodePIN . . . . . . . . . . .11-3

Filter LP Bessel (Electrical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FilterBesselLP_El . . . . . . . . 12-3

Ring Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RingSetup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Optical Spectrum Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ViOSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3

Resample Absolute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ResampleAbsolute . . . . . . . . 15-3

Every module description page consists of the following elements:

All user-settable parameters of a module are displayed in a table. The parameters

Table 1. Notation used for parameter Value Range

Table 2. Actions taken if value is outside the Value Range specification

Information Sources & Coding 1-1

PRBS Generator 1-3

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

Figure 1. A sequence of N bits contains m preceding and n succeeding zero bits.

random sequence is equal to N−m−n; in addition m leading and n trailing zero

Figure 1. NRZ coded “1” and “0” bits.

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

Figure 1. Output pulses with a user-defined rise-time ∆t are generated by filtering

Pulse Sechant (Optical) 2-3

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

bit number n−1 n n+1 n+2

Figure 1. A sequence of sechant pulses.

RS ( t ) = P max ⁄ cosh ( 2t ⁄ T FWHM ⋅ arcosh 2 ) exp [ j ( 2πf c t + φ c ) ] , (2)

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

Figure 1. Schematic of the sechant pulse transmitter.

A sequence of sechant optical pulses is generated using modules PRBS Generator

Laser (Transmission Line Model) 3-24

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

Figure 1. Schematic of the modeled DFB CW laser.

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

In (1), (2) the parameters denote:

where the factors αm and αs (specified by parameters OutputCoupling and

• τe (given by CarrierLifetime) is the carrier lifetime characterizing the recom-

where A, B, and C are constants characterizing the different recombination

• The complex normalized laser gain G̃ ( N, E 2 ) takes into account a dependence

where α (parameter IndexToGainCoupl) is the linewidth enhancement factor

where Γ is the confinement factor (parameter OptConfinement) of the optical

dg/dN (units: m2) is the differential gain (parameter DifferentialGain), char-

where V=L×w×h is the volume, L is the width (parameter Length), w is the

where Ktot (given by parameter SpontEmissFactor) is the enhancement fac-

• Parameter MinimumStepWidth is the minimum allowed step size.

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

Figure 1. Implementation of the galaxy.

Enhanced Simulation Parameters

Figure 1. Example of a schematic using the module Laser Array Transmitter.

Choice of SamplingModeBandwidth (Sample Rate)

Operation with Block-Mode Modules

Modulator Mach-Zehnder 4-3

data = electrical modulation signal